Sharp AR-208S Specifications

ED IN CHINA
2007M
KS1
TINSE1862QSZZ
!AR-208S_208D.book
1 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MODEL
AR-208S
AR-208D
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
(for general information)
Page
PREPARATIONS
9
LOADING PAPER
14
MAKING COPIES
CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
20
26
INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE
36
PRINTER/SCANNER
FUNCTIONS
49
USER SETTINGS
54
TROUBLESHOOTING AND
MAINTENANCE
61
AR-208S/AR-208D
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
APPENDIX
80
82
!AR-208S_208D.book
0 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Each instruction also covers the optional units used with these products.
For users in the USA
FOR YOUR RECORDS ...
To protect against loss theft, record and retain for reference the
copier's serial number located on the back of the unit.
Model Number
Serial Number
Date of Purchase
Authorized Sharp Copier
Service Department Number
NOTICE
BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE WARRANTY THAT YOUR
SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU. In order to assure you, the end-user, of warranty protection,
Sharp extends a limited warranty to each of its authorized dealers and, in turn, requires each of its
authorized dealers to extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those
given to the dealer by Sharp. You should be aware, however, that Sharp does not itself extend any
warranties, either express or implied, directly to you, the end-user, and no one is authorized to make
any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp. Specifically, SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO
YOU, THE END-USER, ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN
CONNECTION WITH THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED IN, OR USED
IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT. Sharp is not responsible for any damages or loss, either
direct, incidental or consequential, which you, the end-user, may experience as a result of your
purchase or use of the hardware, software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this
Product. Your sole remedy, in the event that you encounter any difficulties with this Product, is
against the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product.
AR-208S Digital Multifunctional System
AR-208D Digital Multifunctional System
In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments, please contact the
General Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics Corporation, Sharp Plaza, Mahwah,
New Jersey 07430, so that Sharp can try to help assure complete satisfaction of the warranty rights
to which you are entitled from the authorized dealer.
Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain
compliance with EMC regulations.
Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law. The
following items are normally prohibited from copying by national law. Other
items may be prohibited by local law.
Money
Stamps
Bonds
Stocks
Bank drafts
Checks
Passports
Driver's licenses
!AR-208S_208D.book
1 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONTENTS
CAUTIONS ................................................................................................................ 3
SOFTWARE LICENSE .............................................................................................. 4
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 4
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... 6
MAIN FEATURES...................................................................................................... 7
1 PREPARATIONS
PART NAMES.................................................................................................... 9
POWER ON AND OFF .................................................................................... 12
2 LOADING PAPER
PAPER............................................................................................................. 14
LOADING THE PAPER TRAY ......................................................................... 15
BYPASS FEED (including special paper) ........................................................ 17
CHANGING A TRAY'S PAPER SIZE SETTING .............................................. 19
3 MAKING COPIES
NORMAL COPYING........................................................................................ 20
SELECTING THE TRAY.................................................................................. 23
MAKING A COPY DARKER OR LIGHTER ..................................................... 24
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM ........................................................... 25
4 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING ............................................................. 26
SORT COPY ................................................................................................... 29
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO A SINGLE SHEET OF PAPER
(2 IN 1 copy) .................................................................................................... 31
CREATING MARGINS WHEN COPYING (Margin shift) ................................. 34
5 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE .................................................................................................... 36
BEFORE INSTALLATION ................................................................................ 37
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE....................................................................... 38
SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER ................................................................ 45
1
!AR-208S_208D.book
2 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
6 PRINTER/SCANNER FUNCTIONS
USING THE PRINTER MODE ........................................................................ 50
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PRINTING ........................................................... 50
USING THE SCANNER MODE....................................................................... 51
SCANNING USING THE KEYS ON THE MACHINE ...................................... 51
SCANNING FROM YOUR COMPUTER ......................................................... 52
OPERATION IN COPY, PRINTER, AND SCANNER MODES ........................ 52
HOW TO USE THE ONLINE MANUAL ........................................................... 53
7 USER SETTINGS
USER PROGRAMS......................................................................................... 54
SELECTING A SETTING FOR A USER PROGRAM...................................... 59
8 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY MESSAGES..................................................................................... 61
TROUBLESHOOTING THE MACHINE ........................................................... 63
PROBLEMS DURING SETUP OF THE SOFTWARE ..................................... 67
MISFEED REMOVAL ...................................................................................... 70
TONER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT .......................................................... 74
SCAN HEAD LOCKING SWITCH ................................................................... 76
CHECKING THE TOTAL COUNT.................................................................... 77
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED .......................................................................... 77
CLEANING THE MACHINE ............................................................................ 78
9 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 80
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT (AR-FX13)........................................................ 80
NETWORK EXPANSION KIT (AR-NB2 A) ...................................................... 80
250-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D33) .................................................... 80
10 APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 82
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET ................................................................. 87
INDEX.............................................................................................................. 95
2
!AR-208S_208D.book
3 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CAUTIONS
Caution label on the machine
The label (
) in the fusing area of the machine indicates the following:
: Caution, risk of danger
: Caution, hot surface
Cautions on using the machine
Follow the cautions below when using this machine.
Warning:
• The fusing area is hot. Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper.
• Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
Caution:
• Place the machine on a firm, level surface.
• Do not install the machine in a humid or dusty location.
• When the machine is not used for a long time, for example during prolonged
holidays, turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet.
• When moving the machine, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the
power cord from the outlet.
• Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off. After turning the machine off, wait 10
to 15 seconds before turning it back on.
• Do not cover the machine with a dust cover, cloth or plastic film while the power is
on. Doing so may prevent heat radiation, damaging the machine.
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• The socket-outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily
accessible.
Important points when selecting an installation site
Do not install your machine in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight
• poorly ventilated
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner
or heater.
Be sure to allow the required space around the
8" (20 cm)
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
4"
(10 cm)
4"
(10 cm)
3
!AR-208S_208D.book
4 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Cautions on handling the machine
Be careful in handling the machine as follows to maintain the performance of this
machine.
Do not drop the machine, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.
Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the
package before use.
• If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat, poor copies may result.
Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion).
• Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty copies.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows Vista® and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
and other countries.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE LICENSE will appear when you install the software from the CDROM. By using all or any portion of the software on the CD-ROM or in the machine,
you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE.
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
For users in the USA
Products that have earned the ENERGY STAR® are designed to
protect the environment through superior energy efficiency.
Laser information
Wave length
Pulse times (North America)
Output power
780 nm
+15 nm
-10 nm
12.88 µs ±12.88 ns/7 mm
Max 0.2 mW
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.18
MILLIWATT PLUS 5% and is maintained constant by the operation of the
Automatic Power Control (APC).
4
!AR-208S_208D.book
5 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This Digital Equipment is CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (IEC 60825-1 Edition 1.2-2001)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This Digital Copier is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This means that the equipment does not produce
hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.
• Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.
• The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not
bypass any safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.
A small amount of ozone is produced within the unit during operation. The
emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard.
Note:
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1ppm
(0.2mg/m3) calculated as an 8 hr. time-weighted average concentration.
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it
is advisable to place the unit in a ventilated area.
For users in Canada
The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to
the products only in Canada. The products that meet the
Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo
shown to the left. The products without the logo may not meet
the Environmental Choice Program guidelines.
5
!AR-208S_208D.book
6 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INTRODUCTION
Note
Some model may not be available in some countries.
Using the manual
This machine has been designed to provide convenient copying features in a
minimum amount of office space and with maximum operational ease. To get full use
of all machine features, be sure to familiarize yourself with this manual and the
machine. For quick reference during machine use, keep this manual in a handy
location.
About the operation manuals
The operation manuals for the machine are as follows:
Operation Manual (this manual)
Explains the machine and how to use it as a copier. Also explains how to install the
software that allows the machine to be used as a printer and scanner for your
computer.
Online Manual (on the accessory CD-ROM)
This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer or a
scanner.
Conventions used in this manual and online manual
• The illustrations in this manual show the AR-208D. The appearance of your
machine may be different depending on the model and options installed, however,
the basic operations are the same.
• Where "AR-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your
model for "XXXX". For the name of your model, see the operation panel on the
machine.
• Illustrations of driver screens and other computer screens show the screens that
appear in Windows XP Home Edition. Some of the names that appear in these
illustrations may differ slightly from the screens that appear in other operating systems.
• The explanations in this manual assume that the person who will install the product and
the users of the product have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows.
• This operation manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".
• In this manual, the following icons are used to provide the user with information
pertinent to the use of the machine.
Warns that injury may result if the contents of the warning are
Warning not properly followed.
Cautions that damage to the machine or one of its components may
Caution result if the contents of the caution are not properly followed.
Note
Notes provide useful information on the specifications, functions,
performance, and operation of the machine.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ
from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications.
6
!AR-208S_208D.book
7 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MAIN FEATURES
High-speed laser copying
First-copy time*1 is only 8.0*2 seconds.
Copying speed is 20 copies per minute. This is ideal for business use and provides a
big boost to workplace productivity.
*1 The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following
power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state
and "LSU SETTING" set to ON in the user programs (8-1/2" x 11", paper fed from
paper tray).
*2 When user program 24 is set to OFF.
High-quality digital image
• High-quality copying at 600 dpi is performed.
• In addition to automatic exposure adjustment, two original modes can be selected:
"TEXT" for text-only originals, and "PHOTO" for photographs. The exposure can be
adjusted to five levels in each mode.
• The photo mode copying function allows clear copying of delicate halftone original
images such as monochrome photos and color photos.
Enhanced copying features
• Zoom copies can be made from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%. (When the
RSPF is being used, the zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.)
• Continuous copying of up to 99 copies is possible.
• Sets of output can be offset from each other for easy separation (offset function).
• Sorting by sets is possible without the need for a sorter or other special device
(Sort copy).
• Includes convenient features such as margin shift, 2 IN 1 copy, and automatic twosided copying.
1 2 3
3
1 2 3
2
1
2
3
1 1
1
1 2 3
A
Sort copy
Offset function
2 IN 1 copy
A
Margin shift
Scan once/Print many
• The machine is equipped with a memory buffer allowing the machine to scan an
original once and make up to 99 copies of the scanned image. This improves
workflow, reduces operating noise from the machine and reduces wear and tear on
the scanning mechanism, which provides for a higher reliability.
7
!AR-208S_208D.book
8 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
LCD panel displays messages
• The LCD panel displays messages that show function settings and the status of
the machine.
Laser printer function
• The accompanying printer driver can be installed to enable use of the machine as
a printer.
Color scanner function
• The accompanying scanner driver can be installed and the machine connected to
a computer using a USB cable to enable use as a scanner.
Fax function (option)
• The optional Facsimile Expansion Kit can be installed to enable the machine to be
used as a fax machine. (Facsimile Expansion Kit Operation Manual)
Network connection (option)
• The optional Network Expansion Kit can be installed to enable the machine to be
used as a network printer and network scanner. (Network Expansion Kit Operation
Manual)
Environment and people friendly design
• Preheat mode and auto power shut-off mode are provided to reduce power
consumption when the machine is not in use.
• A universal design has been implemented in the product whereby the height of the
operation panel and shape of the keys are designed to be usable by as many
people as possible.
8
!AR-208S_208D.book
1
9 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 1
PREPARATIONS
This chapter provides basic information that you should know before using the machine.
1
PART NAMES
RSPF
Original guides
Document
feeder cover
1
Exit area
2
Document feeder tray
5
6
7
3
4
Bypass tray
17
Interface
Toner cartridge
USB
connector
Photoconductive
drum
8
5
9
10
14
11
12
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
13
Document glass
Operation panel
Front cover
Paper tray
Side cover
Side cover open button
Bypass tray paper guides
Original output tray extension
Paper output tray
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Paper output tray extension
Power switch
Handles
Power cord
Fusing unit release lever
Transfer charger
Charger cleaner
Paper holder arm
9
!001-Introduction.fm
10 ページ
2007年12月18日 火曜日 午後1時28分
PREPARATIONS
Operation panel
1
2
AR-208S
11
6 7
1 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
10
Press this key to select the mode. The
indicator of the selected mode lights (copy,
printer, scanner, fax mode indicators).
Display
This shows messages indicating the
machine status and any problems that
occur, as well as user programs and
function setting menus.
Numeric keys
Use these to enter the number of copies
and other numerical settings.
The keys can also be used to select
items in function setting menus.
[CLEAR] key (
)
Use this to clear the set number of
copies, as well as cancel a job that is in
progress. When a setting menu appears,
use this key to move back to the
previous menu level.
Power save indicator
This lights up when the power save
function is activated.
RSPF indicator
This lights up when an original is placed
in the RSPF.
Error indicator
This lights steadily or blinks when a
paper misfeed or other error occurs.
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
[TRAY SELECT] key (
)
Use to select the paper tray that has the
desired paper for copying.
9 Tray location indicator
Indicates the selected paper tray. The
indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper
during operation or is not closed properly.
10 [MENU] key
Press this key to select the paper size for
copying, to configure a user program or
to display the total count.
11
11 [2-SIDED COPY] key (AR-208D)
[2-SIDED SCAN] key (AR-208S)
Press in copy mode to select one-sided
or two-sided settings for the original and
for the output.
12
12 [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key
Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1
copy function, or margin shift function.
13
] key (
), [
] key (
),
13 [
[ENTER] key
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key
(
) to select an item in a function
setting menu.
Press the [ENTER] key to enter a selection.
14 [EXPOSURE] key
Use to switch from auto exposure
adjustment to text mode or photo mode.
8
!AR-208S_208D.book
11 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
PREPARATIONS
3
4
5
1
Display
READY TO COPY.
100% 8.5x11
18
16
20
21
17
[COPY RATIO] key
Press to select an enlargement or
reduction ratio.
To select a preset ratio setting, press the
[COPY RATIO] key and select the
desired preset ratio. To select a ratio
that is not preset, press the [COPY
RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that
is closest to the desired ratio, and then
] key
press the [
] key (
) or [
(
) to increase or decrease the ratio in
increments of 1%.
17 [CLEAR ALL] key (
16
)
This returns all functions to the default
settings. When pressed in a setting
menu, this returns the settings and
display to the initial state.
17 [START] key (
16
) / Ready indicator
The ready indicator lights up when
copying or scanning is possible.
To begin copying, press the [START]
key (
).
The [START] key (
) is also pressed
to return to normal operation from auto
power shut-off mode.
15
15
19
0
18 Shows the current copy ratio.
19 Shows the selected paper size.
20 Shows the number of copies that has
been entered with the numeric keys.
" appears when the
exposure has been changed, or when
two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or
margin shift is selected.
21 A checkmark "
11
!AR-208S_208D.book
12 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
POWER ON AND OFF
The power switch is located on the left side of the machine.
If you use the machine in a country other than the country
Warning where the machine was purchased, you will need to make sure
that your local power supply is compatible with your model. If
you plug the machine into an incompatible power supply,
irreparable damage to the machine will result.
Power on
Turn the power switch to the "ON" position.
The ready indicator will light up and other indicators
which show the initial settings of the display will also
light up to indicate the ready condition. For the initial
settings, see "Initial settings" (below).
You can select copy settings and press the [START] key (
switch is turned on. Copying will start automatically.
) after the power
Only insert the power cord into a properly grounded wall socket.
Caution Do not use extension cords or power strips.
Language setting
The first time the power is turned on after shipment from the factory, a message will
appear in English in the display prompting you to select the language. Select the
language with the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) and then press the [ENTER] key.
The language can also be changed in the user programs (p.57).
Initial settings
The machine reverts to the initial settings when it is first turned on, when the [CLEAR
ALL] key (
) is pressed, or when no keys are pressed for the preset "AUTO
CLEAR" time following the end of a copy job. When the machine reverts to the initial
settings, all settings and functions selected to that point are canceled. The "AUTO
CLEAR" can be changed in the user programs. (p.54)
When in the copy mode
READY TO COPY.
100% 8.5x11
0
The main screen of copy mode appears.
Copy ratio: 100%, Exposure: Automatic
Copy quantity: 0, All special copier modes: Off
Scanning unit (scan head)
When the machine is able to copy or scan (the ready indicator is on), the scanning
unit is lit.
12
!AR-208S_208D.book
13 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
PREPARATIONS
Power off
Make sure that the machine is not in operation and then turn the power
switch to the "OFF" position.
If the power switch is turned off while the machine is
in operation, a misfeed may occur and the job that
was in progress will be canceled.
In cases where the machine will not be used for a
long time, turn off the power switch and remove the
power cord from the outlet.
1
Check the following to make sure the machine is not in operation:
• The ready indicator is lit. (Initial state)
• The power save indicator is lit. (preheat mode or auto power shut-off mode)
Power save modes
The machine has two power save modes to reduce overall power consumption and
thereby reduce the cost of operation. In addition, these modes conserve natural
resources and help reduce environmental pollution. The two power save modes are
preheat mode and auto power shut-off mode.
Preheat mode
This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if
the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is
on. In this mode, the power save indicator lights up. Normal operation automatically
resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print
job is received.
Auto power shut-off mode
This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less
power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being
used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, the display shows a
message indicating that the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. To resume normal
operation, press the [START] key (
). Normal operation also resumes automatically
when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power
shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key (
)) can be used.
Note
The preheat activation time and the auto power shut-off time can be
changed with "PREHEAT MODE" and "AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME" in the
user programs. It is suggested that you set times that are appropriate
for your usage of the machine. (p.54 and p.55)
Check RSPF open function
When enabled, this function may help prevent wasteful use of toner that occurs
when the RSPF cover is not completely closed.
If the start (
) key is pressed when the RSPF cover is not completely closed,
"CLOSE THE SPF/RSPF COVER." will appear in the display and copying may not
take place. If copying does not take place, copying can be performed by pressing the
start (
) key again, however, the scan size set in "TRAY'S PAPER SIZE SETTING"
(p.19) or "VALID COPY WIDTH" (program number 25) (p.57) will be used.
If the RSPF cover is completely closed after "CLOSE THE SPF/RSPF COVER."
appears, copying will take place at the normal size.
13
!AR-208S_208D.book
2
14 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 2
LOADING PAPER
The tray location indicator will blink when there is no paper in the selected paper
tray, or when the selected paper tray is not closed or is improperly closed.
PAPER
For best results, use only SHARP recommended paper.
Paper tray type
Paper type
Size
Weight
Capacity
Paper tray
Standard paper 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
15 lbs. to 21 lbs.
Recycled paper (Invoice)
(56 g/m2 to
8-1/2" x 11" (Letter) 80 g/m2)
8-1/2" x 13"
(Foolscap)
8-1/2" x 14" (Legal)
250 sheets *1
(The paper
should not
exceed the
line on the
tray)
Bypass tray
Standard paper 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" to
Recycled paper 8-1/2" x 14"
15 lbs. to 21 lbs.
(56 g/m2 to
80 g/m2)
50 sheets *1
Thick paper
15 lbs. to 34.5 lbs. Load one
(56 g/m2 to
sheet at a
128 g/m2)*3
time in the
bypass tray.
Transparency
film/Labels
Envelopes *2
Monarch
(3-7/8" x 7-1/2")
Commercial 9
(3-7/8" x 8-7/8")
Commercial 10
(4-1/8" x 9-1/2")
*1 The number of sheets of paper that can be loaded varies depending on the weight of
the paper.
*2 Do not use non-standard envelopes or envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic
snappers, strings, windows, linings, self-adhesive strips, patches or synthetic materials.
Do not use envelopes that are filled with air or envelopes that have labels or stamps
attached. These will damage the machine.
*3 When using paper heavier than 28 lbs. (104 g/m2), use paper that is 8-1/2" x 11" or
smaller.
14
!AR-208S_208D.book
15 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
LOADING PAPER
Special papers
Follow these guidelines when using special papers.
● Use SHARP recommended transparency film and label sheets. Using other
than SHARP recommended paper may result in misfeeds or smudges on
the output. If other than SHARP recommended media must be used, feed
each sheet one at a time using the bypass tray (do not attempt continuous
copying or printing).
● There are many varieties of special paper available on the market, and
some cannot be used with this machine. Before using special paper,
contact a SHARP service center.
● Before using other than SHARP recommended paper, make a test copy to
see if the paper is suitable.
2
LOADING THE PAPER TRAY
Note
Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has no wrinkles
or curled edges.
1
Raise the handle of the paper tray
and pull the paper tray out until it
stops.
2
Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the
edges go under the corner hooks.
Note
• Do not load paper above the maximum height line (
).
Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
• If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur.
• Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When
adding paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a
single stack with the new paper.
• Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and type.
• When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the
paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too
narrow and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will cause the
paper to skew or misfeed.
15
!AR-208S_208D.book
16 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
LOADING PAPER
3
Gently push the paper tray back into the machine.
Note
16
• If you loaded a paper size that is different from the previously loaded
paper size, change the paper size setting as explained in
"CHANGING A TRAY'S PAPER SIZE SETTING" (p.19)
• When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all
paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is left in
the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb moisture
from the air, resulting in paper jams.
!AR-208S_208D.book
17 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
BYPASS FEED (including special paper)
The bypass tray can be used to feed standard paper, transparency film, labels,
envelopes, and other special purpose paper.
Important points when inserting paper in the bypass tray
Up to 50 sheets of standard copy paper can be inserted in the bypass tray. (Capacity
will vary depending on the type of paper loaded.)
Be sure to place envelopes horizontally as shown in the following diagram.
2
Not
Available
When loading envelopes, make sure that they are straight and flat and do not have
loosely glued construction flaps (not the closure flap).
Special papers such as SHARP recommended transparency film, labels, and
envelopes must be fed one sheet at a time through the bypass tray.
When adding paper, first remove any paper remaining in the tray, combine it with
the paper to be added and then reload as a single stack. The paper to be added
must be the same size and type as the paper already in the tray.
Do not use paper that is smaller than the original. This may cause smudges or
unclean images.
Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a laser printer or plain paper
fax machine. This may cause smudges or unclean images.
Available
•
•
•
•
•
Envelopes
Do not use the following envelopes, as misfeeds will occur.
• Envelopes with metal tabs, clasps, strings, holes, or windows.
• Envelopes with rough fibers, carbon paper, or glossy surfaces.
• Envelopes with two or more flaps.
• Envelopes with tape, film, or paper attached to the flap.
• Envelopes with a fold in the flap.
• Envelopes with glue on the flap to be moistened for sealing.
• Envelopes with labels or stamps.
• Envelopes that are slightly inflated with air.
• Envelopes with glue protruding from the seal area.
• Envelopes with part of the seal area peeled off.
• Be sure to select com9, com10 or Monarch in the paper size setting of the printer
driver. (For detailed information on the printer driver, refer to the online manual.)
17
!002-Paper.fm 18 ページ
2007年12月20日 木曜日 午前10時2分
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in the bypass tray
Note
1
• Paper must be fed narrow side first into the feed slot.
• Special papers such as transparency film, labels, and envelopes
must be fed one sheet at a time through the bypass tray.
• When copying onto transparency film, remove each copy promptly.
Do not let copies stack up.
Open the bypass tray and extend the tray.
Note
To close the bypass tray, perform step 1 and then step 2 in the
illustration and push the round projections at the right of the tray
until they click.
2
1
2
Set the bypass tray paper guides to the paper width. Insert the
paper (print face down) all the way into the bypass tray.
Print face
3
Press the [TRAY SELECT] key (
) to select the bypass tray.
Note for loading thick paper
Copying on thick paper requires higher fusing temperature setting. Set the user
program 29 to "2 (HEAVY PAPER)" when using thick paper. (See page 57.)
18
!AR-208S_208D.book
19 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CHANGING A TRAY'S PAPER SIZE SETTING
Follow these steps to change a tray's paper size setting.
Note
• The paper size setting cannot be changed when the machine has
stopped temporarily due to running out of paper or a misfeed.
• During printing (even in copy mode), the paper size setting cannot be
changed.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) until "PAPER SIZE"
appears, and then press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
select the tray, and then press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the paper size, and then press the
[ENTER] key.
) to
PAPER SIZE
1:TRAY1
2
TRAY1
1:8.5X14
The paper size changes as follows each time the
[
] key (
) or [
] key (
) is pressed:
"8.5x14"→"8.5x13"→"8.5x11"→"5.5x8.5"
→"A4"→"B5"→"A5".
Note
4
When you have finished configuring the tray's paper size setting,
press the [MENU] key.
Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the front
guide to match the width of the paper, and move the left guide
to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.
Left
guide
Front
guide
• The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob on the guide
and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper to be loaded.
• The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then insert it at the
indicator line of the paper to be loaded.
19
!003-making copies.fm 20 ページ
3
2007年12月14日 金曜日 午前8時40分
Chapter 3
MAKING COPIES
This chapter explains basic copying functions.
NORMAL COPYING
Using the document glass
Note
1
• The document glass can scan up to 8-1/2" x 14" original.
• When a copy is made, the edges will not be copied (image loss). For
the image loss, see the "SPECIFICATIONS" (p.82).
Open the RSPF, and place the original face down on the
document glass.
[How to place the original]
Original scale
Align the original with the original scale and the
centering ( ) mark.
mark
2
Gently close the RSPF.
3
Select the number of copies and any other copy settings, and
then press the [START] key (
).
Note
• To stop copying in the middle of a run, press the [CLEAR] key (
• For the copy settings, see pages 23 through 35.
Copying books or originals with folds or creases
Press down on the RSPF while copying as shown. If
the RSPF is not completely closed, shadows may
appear on the copy or it may be fuzzy. Straighten
originals that have folds or creases before placing it
on the document glass.
20
).
!003-making copies.fm 21 ページ
2007年12月14日 金曜日 午前9時51分
MAKING COPIES
Using the RSPF
Note
• Originals that are 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 14" and 14 lbs. to 24 lbs.
(56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) can be used. A maximum of 50 pages can be
placed at once.
• Straighten curled originals before placing them in the document
feeder tray. Curled originals may cause misfeeds.
• Place originals horizontally.
• Before placing originals in the document feeder tray, be sure to
remove any staples or paper clips from them.
• When a copy is made, the edges will not be copied (image loss).
For the image loss, see the "SPECIFICATIONS" (p.82).
• When using the margin shift function, check the position of the
margins carefully. (p.34)
1
Make sure that an original has not been left on the document
glass.
2
Adjust the original guides to the size
of the originals.
3
Place the original(s) face up in the
document feeder tray without trying
to force them in.
3
Original face up
The RSPF indicator on the operation panel
will light up. If this indicator does not light up,
the originals are not properly set or the RSPF
is not properly closed.
4
Select the number of copies and any other copy settings, and
then press the [START] key (
).
Note
• The default output mode for copying from the RSPF is sort mode
(P.29), and a checkmark " " will automatically appear in the display
(P.11). If "SORT AUTO SELECT" is disabled in the user programs,
the default output mode will be non-sort mode. (P.57)
• To stop copying in the middle of a run, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• For the copy settings, see pages 23 through 35.
21
!AR-208S_208D.book
22 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MAKING COPIES
Originals that cannot be used in the RSPF
The following originals cannot be used. These may cause misfeeds or smudging and
unclear images.
• Transparencies, tracing paper, other transparent or translucent paper, and
photographs.
• Carbon paper, thermal paper.
• Originals that are creased, folded, or torn.
• Glued originals, cut-out originals.
• Originals with binder holes.
• Originals printed using an ink ribbon (thermal transfer printing), originals on
thermal transfer paper.
Original output tray extension
When placing an original larger than 8-1/2" x 11" size, pull out the original output tray
extension of the RSPF.
Capacity of paper output tray
The paper output tray can hold a
maximum of 200 pages. If more
than 200 pages are allowed to
accumulate, a paper jam may occur.
Paper output tray extension
When copying onto paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" size, pull out the paper output tray
extension.
Paper holder arm
The paper output tray has a paper holder arm. The paper holder arm presses gently
on the output paper to stack it (p.9).
Note
22
After removing paper, if you need to return the paper to the paper
output tray, lift up the paper holder arm and place the paper under
the arm.
!AR-208S_208D.book
23 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MAKING COPIES
Setting the number of copies
Press the numeric keys to set the number of copies.
OPY.
x11
55
The set number of copies appears in the display. A maximum of 99 copies can be set.
If you wish to make only a single copy, copying is possible with the display
showing "0".
Note
If you enter the wrong number, press the [CLEAR] key (
enter the correct number.
) and
3
SELECTING THE TRAY
Press the [TRAY SELECT] key (
).
Each time, you press the [TRAY SELECT] key (
),
the location indicated by the tray location indicator
changes in the following order : paper tray→lower
paper tray (when the 250-sheet paper feed unit is
installed.)→bypass tray.
Note
READY TO COPY.
100%
EXTRA
The tray location indicator will blink when there is no paper in the paper
tray during operations, or when the tray is not closed or is improperly
closed.
23
!AR-208S_208D.book
24 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MAKING A COPY DARKER OR LIGHTER
Automatic exposure adjustment is initially enabled. This function automatically
adjusts the copy image according to the original being copied. If you wish to select
the exposure level yourself, follow the steps below. (Select from 2 original types and
5 exposure levels for each original type.) The exposure level used in automatic
exposure adjustment can also be changed with "AE LEVEL ADJUST" in the user
programs (p.57).
Original types
● AUTO ...... Automatic exposure adjustment is enabled and the exposure is
automatically adjusted according to the original being copied. The
exposure is lowered for colored areas and background shadows.
● TEXT ....... The exposure is raised for light areas and lowered for dark
backgrounds to make text easier to read.
● PHOTO ... Halftones in the photo are reproduced with greater clarity.
1
Place the original(s).
2
Press the [EXPOSURE] key to select the
original type.
TEXT
| | | | |
The original image type changes as follows each
time the [EXPOSURE] key is pressed: "AUTO" →
"TEXT" → "PHOTO".
Note
3
To return to auto exposure adjustment, press the [EXPOSURE] key
until "AUTO" appears.
If needed, adjust the exposure level for
TEXT or PHOTO.
For a darker image, press the [
] key (
lighter image, press the [
] key (
).
TEXT
| | | | |
). For a
4
Press the [ENTER] key.
5
Select the number of copies and any other copy settings, and
then press the [START] key (
).
Note
Exposure value guidelines (When in "TEXT" setting)
TEXT
| | | | |
Colored text or text written in pencil
Normal originals
Dark originals like newspapers
24
!AR-208S_208D.book
25 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
Copies can be reduced down to 25% or enlarged up to 400%. (When the RSPF is
being used, the zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.) The [COPY RATIO] key can
be pressed to quickly select a ratio from among eight preset ratios. In addition, the
[
] key (
) and [
] key (
) can be pressed to select the ratio in increments of
1%.
1
Place the original(s) and check the paper size.
2
Press the [COPY RATIO] key.
3
Press the [COPY RATIO] key and/or [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the desired copy ratio and then press the
[ENTER] key.
Selecting a preset ratio
The preset ratios change as follows each time the
[COPY RATIO] key is pressed:
"100%" → "78%" → "64%" → "50%" → "25%" →
"400%" → "200%" → "129%"
Fine adjustment of the ratio
The ratio can be adjusted from 25% to 400% in
increments of 1%.
Use the [
] key (
) or the [
] key (
) for
fine adjustment.
Note
4
COPY RATIO
- 100%
+
3
8.5x14 TO 8.5x11
78% +
ZOOM
-
99%
+
• To return the ratio to 100%, press the [COPY RATIO] key until 100%
appears.
• Press the [COPY RATIO] key to set the approximate ratio, then press
the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
).
• To decrease or increase the zoom ratio rapidly, hold down the [
]
key (
) or [
] key (
).
The ratio will stop changing at each of the preset ratios. To continue
changing the ratio, release the key and then hold it down again.
Select the number of copies and any other copy settings, and
then press the [START] key (
).
The copy will be delivered to the paper output tray.
25
!AR-208S_208D.book
4
26 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 4
CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING
Two originals can be automatically copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper.
When the RSPF is used, two-sided copies of two-sided originals can easily be made.
(On the AR-208S, only two-sided original → one sided copy is possible.)
Original → Paper
Usable paper
One-sided original → Two sides*
Document
glass
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 8-1/2" x
11", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 14"
• The bypass tray
cannot be used.
RSPF
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 8-1/2" x
11", 8-1/2" x 13",
8-1/2" x 14"
• Special paper cannot
be used.
• The bypass tray can
only be used when
making one-sided
copies from twosided originals.
One-sided
original →
Two sides*
Two-sided
original →
One side
Two-sided
original →
Two sides*
* AR-208D only
When performing automatic two-sided copying of one-sided originals, the orientation
of the copied image can be selected according to the binding position of the paper.
SHORT EDGE: Select when binding the paper at the short edge.
A B
(Paper orientation: Landscape)
A
B
(Paper orientation: Portrait)
LONG EDGE: Select when binding the paper at the long edge.
A
B
(Paper orientation: Landscape)
26
A B
(Paper orientation: Portrait)
!AR-208S_208D.book
27 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Using the document glass (AR-208D only)
1
Place the original that you wish to copy onto the front side of
the paper on the document glass and close the RSPF.
2
Press the [2-SIDED COPY] key until "1 TO
2" appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the binding edge and then press the
[ENTER] key.
2-SIDED COPY
1 TO 2
BINDING EDGE
LONG EDGE
Select "LONG EDGE" or "SHORT EDGE".
The "LONG EDGE" and "SHORT EDGE" are
shown in the illustration on the preceding page.
4
4
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
"[START] : NEXT SCAN [#] : START PRINT" appears and the original is
scanned into memory.
To immediately print the scanned image, press the [
] key.
Replace the original with the next
original and close the RSPF, and
then press the [START] key (
).
Note
2
Repeat step 5 until all originals have been
scanned.
Copies will be output each time two originals
have been scanned.
When the number of original pages is odd
The first original The second original
and "[START] : NEXT SCAN [#] : START
PRINT" appears, press the [
] key after all pages have been scanned.
1
5
• If you need to clear the data scanned into memory, press the
[CLEAR] key (
). When the [CLEAR] key (
) is pressed, the
number of copies setting is also cleared.
• To cancel automatic two-sided copying, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
) or press the [2-SIDED COPY] key, select the "1 TO 1", and then
press the [ENTER] key.
• If the special function sort mode was selected in step 4, copying will
not begin until the [
] key is pressed.
27
!AR-208S_208D.book
28 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Using the RSPF
1
Place the original(s) in the RSPF. (p.21)
If you place an odd number of originals for one-sided to two-sided copying,
the last page will be one-sided.
2
Press the [2-SIDED COPY] key*1 and select
the two-sided copy mode that you wish to
use.
2-SIDED COPY
2 TO 1
The mode changes as follows each time you press
the [2-SIDED COPY] key*1:
"1 TO 1" → "1 TO 2"*2 → "2 TO 2"*2 → "2 TO 1"
• "1 TO 2"*2: Two-sided copies from one-sided originals
• "2 TO 2"*2: Two-sided copies from two-sided originals
• "2 TO 1": One-sided copies from two-sided originals
*1 On the AR-208S, press the [2-SIDED SCAN] key.
*2 AR-208D only
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
If you selected "1 TO 2" in step 2, select "LONG EDGE" or "SHORT EDGE"
and press the [ENTER] key. LONG EDGE and SHORT EDGE are shown in
the illustration on page 26.
4
If you selected "2 TO 1" or "2 TO 2", press
the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select
the original size and then press the
[ENTER] key.
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
5.5x8.5
The following original sizes can be selected:
"8.5x14", "8.5x13", "8.5x11", "5.5x8.5", "A4", "B5",
"A5"
5
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
The copy will be delivered to the paper output tray.
Note
28
To cancel automatic two-sided copying, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
(
) or press the [2-SIDED COPY] key (On the AR-208S, press the [2SIDED SCAN] key.), select the "1 TO 1", and then press the [ENTER]
key.
!AR-208S_208D.book
29 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
SORT COPY
Copies of multiple original pages can be sorted into sets.
Note
The number of pages that can be scanned varies depending on the
original type (photo, text, etc.) and the amount of memory allocated to
the printer. The amount of memory allocated to the printer can be
changed with "MEM. FOR PRINTER" in the user programs. (p.56)
1 2 3
3
1 2 3
2
1
1 2 3
Sort copy
Using the document glass
1
Place the first original. (p.20)
2
Press the [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key until
"SORT" appears and then press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) to move " " to
the "ON" position and then press the
[ENTER] key.
4
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
SPECIAL FUNCTION
SORT
SORT
ON
4
OFF
"[START] : NEXT SCAN [#] : START PRINT" appears and the original is
scanned into memory.
5
Replace the original with the next original, and then press the
[START] key ( ).
Repeat step 5 until all originals have been scanned into memory.
Note
6
To clear the data in memory, press the [CLEAR] key (
). When the
[CLEAR] key (
) is pressed, the number of copies setting is also cleared.
When all originals have been scanned, press the [
] key.
The copies are delivered to the paper output tray.
Note
• To cancel the sort copy job, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• To cancel sort copy mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
29
!AR-208S_208D.book
30 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Using the RSPF
1
Place the originals. (p.21)
• If "SORT AUTO SELECT" is enabled in the user programs, the default output
mode for copying from the RSPF is sort mode (p.57). In this case go directly
to step 4. A checkmark " " will automatically appear in the display (p.11).
• If "SORT AUTO SELECT" is disabled, the default output mode will be nonsort mode. Follow the steps below to select sort mode.
Note
2
Press the [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key until
"SORT" appears and then press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) to move " " to
the "ON" position and then the [ENTER]
key.
4
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
SPECIAL FUNCTION
SORT
SORT
ON
OFF
The copies are delivered to the paper output tray.
• To cancel the sort copy job, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• To cancel sort copy mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
Note
If the memory becomes full
• If the memory becomes full while scanning the originals, "MEMORY FULL, PRESS
START TO RESUME" will appear in the display, and the machine will stop copying.
• To copy the originals that have been scanned up to that point, press the [START]
key ( ).
• To clear the data that has been scanned into memory, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
( ) or the [CLEAR] key ( ).
Offset function during sort copy
The offset function shifts the position of each set of copies in the paper output tray
for easy separation.
The offset function can be changed with "OFFSET FUNCTION" in the user
programs. (p.55)
2
3
1 1
1
Offset function
30
2
3
1
1
When offset function is disabled
!AR-208S_208D.book
31 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO A SINGLE
SHEET OF PAPER
(2 IN 1 copy)
Multiple originals can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a selected layout
pattern.
This function is convenient for compiling multi-page reference materials into a
compact format, or for providing an overview of all pages of a document on a single
page.
Pattern 1
Note
Pattern 2
• An appropriate ratio setting will be automatically selected based on
the size of the originals, the size of the paper. When using the
document glass, reduction is possible to 25%. When using the RSPF,
reduction is possible to 50%. Certain combinations of original size
and paper size may result in images being cut off.
• 2 IN 1 copying cannot be used in combination with the margin shift
copying.
• The 2 IN 1 layout pattern can be changed with "LAYOUT IN 2IN1" in
the user programs (p.55).
• The bypass tray cannot be used for 2 IN 1 copying.
4
Using the document glass
1
Place the first original. (p.20)
2
Press the [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key until
"2IN1" appears and then press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) to move " " to
the "ON" position and then press the
[ENTER] key.
SPECIAL FUNCTION
2IN1
2IN1
ON
OFF
31
!AR-208S_208D.book
32 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the original size and then press the
[ENTER] key.
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
5.5x8.5
The following original sizes can be selected:
"8.5x14", "8.5x13", "8.5x11", "5.5x8.5", "A4", "B5",
"A5"
5
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
"[START] : NEXT SCAN [#] : START PRINT" appears and the original is
scanned into memory.
To immediately print the scanned image, press the [
] key.
6
Replace the original with the next original, and then press the
[START] key ( ).
Repeat step 6 until all originals have been scanned.
Copies will be output each time two originals have been scanned.
When the number of original pages is odd and "[START] : NEXT SCAN [#] :
START PRINT" appears, press the [
] key after all pages have been
scanned.
Note
32
• To clear the data in memory, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
When the [CLEAR] key (
) is pressed, the number of copies
setting is also cleared.
• To cancel 2 IN 1 copying, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• To cancel 2 IN 1 copy mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
!AR-208S_208D.book
33 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Using the RSPF
1
Place the originals. (p.21)
2
Press the [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key until
"2IN1" appears and then press the
[ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) to move " " to
the "ON" position and then press the
[ENTER] key.
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the original size and then press the
[ENTER] key.
SPECIAL FUNCTION
2IN1
2IN1
ON
OFF
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
5.5x8.5
4
The following original sizes can be selected:
"8.5x14", "8.5x13", "8.5x11", "5.5x8.5", "A4", "B5",
"A5"
5
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and press
the [START] key (
).
The copy is delivered to the paper output tray.
Note
• To cancel 2 IN 1 copying, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• To cancel 2 IN 1 copy mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
33
!AR-208S_208D.book
34 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CREATING MARGINS WHEN COPYING
(Margin shift)
The margin shift function is used to automatically shift the text or image or the copy
paper approximately 1/2".
As shown below, LONG EDGE or SHORT EDGE can be selected.
AB
SHORT EDGE
RSPF
BA
LONG EDGE
AB
AB
Margin
Margin
Copy
Document glass
Original
Note
34
• This feature cannot be used with the 2 IN 1 feature.
• The margin width can be changed with "MARGIN WIDTH" in the user
programs. (p.56)
• Note that a margin is created by shifting the image, and thus if the
image is shifted too far, the edge of the image may be cut off.
1
Place the original(s).
2
Press the [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key until
"MARGIN SHIFT" appears and then press
the [ENTER] key.
SPECIAL FUNCTION
MARGIN SHIFT
!AR-208S_208D.book
35 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) to move " " to
the "ON" position and then press the
[ENTER] key.
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the margin position and then press
the [ENTER] key.
MARGIN SHIFT
ON
OFF
MARGIN SHIFT
LONG EDGE
Select "LONG EDGE" or "SHORT EDGE".
For the margin position, see the previous page.
5
Select the number of copies and any other settings, and then
press the [START] key (
).
The copy is delivered to the paper output tray.
Note
• To cancel margin shift copying, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• To cancel margin shift mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
4
35
!AR-208S_208D.book
5
36 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 5
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
This chapter explains how to install and configure the software that is required for the
printer and scanner functions of the machine. The procedure for viewing the Online
Manual is also explained.
Note
This manual refers to the CD-ROM that accompanied the machine
simply as "CD-ROM".
SOFTWARE
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software:
MFP driver
Printer driver
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine.
The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility that monitors
the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name of the document
currently being printed, and error messages.
Scanner driver
The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with
TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
Sharpdesk
Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage
documents and image files, and launch applications.
Button Manager
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine to scan a
document.
36
!AR-208S_208D.book
37 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
BEFORE INSTALLATION
Hardware and software requirements
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to install the
software.
Computer type
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a
USB2.0*1/1.1*2
5
Operating system*3 *4 Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional* ,
Windows XP*5, Windows Vista*5
Display
1024 x 768 dots resolution and 16-bit color or higher is
recommended.
Hard disk free space 150 MB or more
Other hardware
requirements
An environment on which any of the operating systems
listed above can fully operate
*1 The machine's USB connector will transfer data at the speed specified by the USB 2.0
(Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is installed in the computer.
*2 Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP
or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port.
*3 Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
*4 The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment.
*5 Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer.
5
37
!AR-208S_208D.book
38 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Note
1
• The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With
other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different
from those in this manual.
• In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is
configured for right hand operation.
• If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to
solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation
procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to
click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the
software from the beginning after solving the problem.
The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make
sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this
happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the
cable.
Note
The cable will be connected in step 13.
2
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
3
Click the "start" button, click "My Computer" (
double-click the CD-ROM icon ( ).
), and then
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4
Double-click the "setup" icon (
).
In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation,
click "Allow".
5
The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure
that you understand the contents of the software license, and
then click the "Yes" button.
Note
6
38
You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by
selecting the desired language from the language menu. To install the
software in the selected language, continue the installation with that
language selected.
Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then
click the "Next" button.
!AR-208S_208D.book
39 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
7
To install all of the software, click
the "Standard" button and go to
step 12.
To install particular packages,
click the "Custom" button and go
to next step.
8
Click the "MFP Driver" button.
Click the "Display Readme" button to
show information on packages that are
selected.
5
9
Select "Connected to this
computer" and click the "Next"
button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure
to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
39
!AR-208S_208D.book
40 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
10
You will return to the window of step 8. If you wish to install
Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software"
button.
If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button and
go to step 12.
Note
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer
may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
Installing the Utility Software
11
Click the "Button Manager" or the
"Sharpdesk" button.
Click the "Display Readme" button to
show information on packages that are
selected.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears, click the "Skip"
Caution button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the
Sharpdesk installation.
If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk
installation will continue without
installing Sharpdesk Imaging.
If "Continue" is selected,
Sharpdesk Imaging will be
installed. If Imaging for Windows is
installed on your computer,
Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite
Imaging for Windows.
40
!AR-208S_208D.book
41 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
12
When installing is finished, click the "Close" button.
Caution
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure
to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your
computer. Click the "OK" button.
Note
13
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer
may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable (p.42).
Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear.
14
Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install
the driver.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure
to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
5
This completes the installation of the software.
• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "SETTING
UP BUTTON MANAGER" (p.45).
• If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will appear. Follow the
instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
41
!AR-208S_208D.book
42 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Connecting a USB cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.
A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not included with the
machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer.
Caution
Note
42
• USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was
originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista
preinstalled.
• Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver. The
USB cable should be connected during installation of the printer
driver.
• If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your
computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
• To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE
SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to
"HI-SPEED". For more information, see "USER PROGRAMS" (p.58).
• Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer
that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
• Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be
possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0
is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher
speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card.
• Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.
However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications
(Full-Speed).
1
Insert the cable into the USB
connector on the machine.
2
Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
!AR-208S_208D.book
43 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Using the machine as a shared printer
If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to
install the printer driver in the client computer.
Note
To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the
operation manual or help file of your operating system.
1
Perform steps 2 through 6 in "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE"
(p.38).
2
Click the "Custom" button.
3
Click the "MFP Driver" button.
5
Click the "Display Readme" button to
show information on packages that are
selected.
4
Select "Connected via the
network" and click the "Next"
button.
43
!AR-208S_208D.book
44 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
5
Click the "Add Network Port"
button.
In Windows Vista, the "Add Network
Port" button does not appear.
6
Select the network printer that is
shared and click the "OK" button.
Ask your network administrator for the
server name and printer name of the
machine on the network.
7
In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer
that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the
default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution
8
• If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
• f you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears
regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click
"Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
You will return to the window of step 3. Click the "Close"
button.
Note
After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer
may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the software.
44
!AR-208S_208D.book
45 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER
Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable
scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the scan menu on
the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to scanner events.
Windows XP/Vista
1
Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers
and Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel" and click
"Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
2
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from
the "File" menu.
In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize" menu.
3
In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
4
Select "SC1:" from the "Select an
event" pull-down menu.
5
45
!AR-208S_208D.book
46 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
5
Select "Start this program" and
then select "Sharp Button
Manager T" from the pull-down
menu.
6
Click the "Apply" button.
7
Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select "Start this
program", select "Sharp Button Manager T" from the pull-down menu, and
then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through
"SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the
screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed with
the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for
configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the
Online Manual.
46
!AR-208S_208D.book
47 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Windows 98/Me/2000
1
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click
"Control Panel".
2
Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note
3
If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me,
click "view all Control Panel options".
Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.
In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the
pop-up menu.
4
In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
5
Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner
events" pull-down menu.
5
47
!AR-208S_208D.book
48 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
6
Select "Sharp Button Manager T"
in "Send to this application".
Note
If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the other
applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected.
7
Click the "Apply" button.
8
Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select "Sharp
Button Manager T" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the
screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed with
the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for
configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the
Online Manual.
48
!AR-208S_208D.book
6
49 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 6
PRINTER/SCANNER
FUNCTIONS
The machine includes a USB connector as standard equipment.
The machine has the following features:
• High-speed data transfer (when connected to a USB 2.0 connector)
• ROPM* function
* ROPM is an acronym for "Rip Once Print Many" processing. The ROPM function stores
multiple pages of print data in memory before printing. When printing multiple copies,
this eliminates the need for the computer to repeatedly transmit the print data.
To use the machine as a printer or scanner, the printer driver or scanner driver must
first be installed as explained in the "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE".
Note
• If a problem occurs in printer or scanner mode, see the Online
Manual.
• When using USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed mode), be sure to read "System
requirements for USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed mode)" (below) to verify that
your system and the machine settings are configured appropriately.
System requirements for USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed mode)
The following system is required to use USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed mode):
• Your computer must be running Windows 2000 Professional/XP/Vista and the
Microsoft USB 2.0 driver must be installed.
• The "USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH" setting in the machine's user programs must be
set to "HI-SPEED". To change the setting, see "USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH" in the
user programs (p.58).
* Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is installed, some USB 2.0 expansion cards
are not capable of attaining the speed stipulated by the Hi-Speed standard. This
problem can often be fixed by installing a more recent driver for the card. To obtain
the most recent driver for your card, contact the card's manufacturer.
6
49
!AR-208S_208D.book
50 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USING THE PRINTER MODE
The procedure for loading paper for printing is the same as for loading copy paper.
See "LOADING PAPER" (p.14).
Note
• Print jobs received while the machine is copying will be stored in
memory. When the copy job is finished, the print jobs will begin
printing.
• Printing is not possible when the front or side cover is opened for
machine maintenance, or when a misfeed occurs or the machine
runs out of paper or toner.
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR PRINTING
The basic procedure for printing is explained in the following. To use convenient
printer functions, see the "Online Manual" or the printer driver help file.
1
Make sure that paper is loaded in the tray.
The procedure for loading paper is the same as for copying. See "LOADING
PAPER" (p.14) and make sure that the paper you wish to use is loaded.
Note
Make sure that the paper size setting on the machine is the same as the
paper size set in the printer driver.
2
Open the file that you wish to print and select "Print" from the
File menu.
3
Make sure that the printer driver for the machine is selected,
and select print settings in the printer driver.
For information on the settings in the printer driver, see the "Online Manual"
or the printer driver help file.
4
Click the "Print" button or the "OK" button to begin printing.
The print job will be delivered to the paper output tray.
Canceling a print job
1
Select printer mode with the [MODE SELECT] key on the
operation panel of the machine, and then press the [CLEAR]
key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
2
"CANCEL PRINT JOB?" will appear in the display. Make sure
that a checkmark appears in front of "YES" and press the
[ENTER] key.
Note
50
For limitations on copying in print mode, scanner mode limitations, and
print mode limitations in copy and scanner mode, see "OPERATION IN
COPY, PRINTER, AND SCANNER MODES" (p.52).
!AR-208S_208D.book
51 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USING THE SCANNER MODE
The procedure for placing the original is the same as for copying. See "NORMAL
COPYING" (p.20).
Note
Scanner mode cannot be used at the following times:
• A misfeed has occurred (paper misfeed or original misfeed in the
RSPF).
• The user programs are being used.
• The tray paper size is being set.
• The machine is being used in copy mode.
• The front cover or side cover is open.
SCANNING USING THE KEYS ON THE MACHINE
When scanning is performed by this method, the application that has been set in
Button Manager will automatically start and the scanned image will be pasted into
the application.
Note
If the machine is in copy mode, press the [MODE SELECT] key to
switch to scanner mode and clear the previously set copy settings.
Scanning from the operation panel of the machine
1
Press the [MODE SELECT] key to select
scanner mode.
The "SCAN" indicator lights up to indicate that
scanner mode is selected.
6
2
Place the original. (p.20)
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the desired Button Manager scan
menu setting.
4
Press the [START] key (
Note
SCAN USING:
SC1:
) to begin scanning.
Scanner mode remains selected after scanning is finished. (To change
to a different mode, use the [MODE SELECT] key.)
51
!006-printer.fm
52 ページ
2007年12月14日 金曜日 午前8時55分
PRINTER/SCANNER FUNCTIONS
Button Manager scan menu
For information on Button Manager settings, see the Button Manager help file. The
names in the Button Manager menu ("xxxx" in "SC1:xxxx", etc.) can be changed.
See the online manual.
SCANNING FROM YOUR COMPUTER
The machine supports the TWAIN standard, making it possible to scan from TWAINcompliant applications. The machine also supports WIA (Windows Image
Acquisition), making it possible to scan from the "Scanner and Camera Wizard" in
Windows XP. See the Online Manual for the procedures for TWAIN and WIA
scanning. For information on TWAIN and WIA settings, see the help file for the
scanner driver or Windows Help.
OPERATION IN COPY, PRINTER, AND SCANNER
MODES
Some operations cannot be performed simultaneously when the machine is being
used in printer mode, copy mode, or scanner mode.
Modes
Copy
Printer
Copy key input
Copying
Yes
During copying
During printing
Scanner During scan preview/
during scanning
Printing
Scanning
from the
machine
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes*
No
Scanning
from a
computer
Yes
* During two-sided printing (AR-208D only), the copy job begins after the print job
finishes.
52
!AR-208S_208D.book
53 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
HOW TO USE THE ONLINE MANUAL
The online manual provides detailed instructions for operating the unit as a printer
and scanner. It also provides methods for dealing with printing or scanner problems.
1
Turn on your computer.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Click the "start" button, click "My Computer" (
double-click the CD-ROM ( ) icon.
), and then
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer" and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon.
4
Double-click the "Manual" folder, double-click the "EnglishA"
folder, and then double-click the "AR_208S_208D.pdf" icon.
5
Click
to read the online manual.
To close the online manual, click the (
the window.
Note
) button located at the top-right of
• The online manual can be printed out using Acrobat Reader. It is
useful to print out sections that you refer to frequently.
• Refer to Acrobat Reader "Help" for more details on the operation and
functions of Acrobat Reader.
Viewing the online manual
6
The "CD-ROM" that accompanies the machine contains an online manual in PDF
format. To view the manual in PDF format, Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader of
Adobe Systems Incorporated is required. If neither program is installed on your
computer, the programs can be downloaded from the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
53
!AR-208S_208D.book
7
54 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 7
USER SETTINGS
The user settings allow you to customize machine settings to better meet your
needs.
USER PROGRAMS
The user settings consist of the following items.
To change a user program setting, see "SELECTING A SETTING FOR A USER
PROGRAM" (p.59).
Copy mode
Program
number
1
54
Program name
AUTO CLEAR
Setting codes
(factory default
setting appears
in bold)
Explanation
1: 10 SEC.
2: 30 SEC.
3: 60 SEC.
4: 90 SEC.
5: 120 SEC.
6: OFF
• Auto clear time automatically
returns the copy settings to
the initial settings (p.12) if no
keys are pressed for a preset
period of time following the
end of a copy job.
• This program is used to select
the period of time. Auto clear
time can also be disabled.
• This function automatically
switches the machine to a low
power consumption state if
the set duration of time
elapses without the machine
being used when the power is
on. The power save indicator
lights up, however, the keys
on the operation panel can be
used. Normal operation
automatically resumes when
a key on the operation panel
is pressed, an original is
placed, a print job is received.
• Use this setting to enable or
disable auto power shut-off
mode.
2
PREHEAT MODE
1: 30 SEC.
2: 1 MIN.
3: 5 MIN.
4: 30 MIN.
5: 60 MIN.
6: 120 MIN.
7: 240 MIN.
3
AUTO SHUT-OFF
1: ON
2: OFF
!AR-208S_208D.book
55 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USER SETTINGS
Program
number
4
7
8
9
10
Program name
AUTO SHUT-OFF
TIME
LAYOUT IN 2IN1
OFFSET
FUNCTION
ROTATE ORIG.
IMAGE*
AE/TEXT
RESOLUTION
Setting codes
(factory default
setting appears
in bold)
Explanation
1: 5 MIN.
2: 30 MIN.
3: 60 MIN.
4: 120 MIN.
5: 240 MIN.
• This function automatically
switches the machine to a state
that consumes even less power
than preheat mode if the set
duration of time elapses without
the machine being used when
the power is on. All lights except
the power save indicator go off.
To resume normal operation,
press the [START] key (
).
Normal operation also resumes
automatically when a print job is
received or scanning is begun
from a computer. While in auto
power shut-off mode, no keys
(except the [START] key (
))
can be used.
1: PATTERN 1
2: PATTERN 2
• Use this setting to select the
layout pattern when two original
pages are copied onto a single
sheet of paper (see page 31 for
the layout patterns).
1: ON
2: OFF
• When enabled, this function
offsets the position of each
set of copies in the output tray
in copy mode, and each print
job in printer mode.
1: ON
2: OFF
• When two-sided copying is
performed, this function rotates
the image on the back of the
original. This is convenient
when binding the copies at the
top (tablet binding).
1: 300dpi
2: 600dpi
• This setting is used to change
the copy resolution in AUTO and
TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi
to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality
mode). Scanning is slower
when high-quality mode is used.
7
* AR-208D only
55
!AR-208S_208D.book
56 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USER SETTINGS
Program
number
Program name
Explanation
11
2-SIDED COPY
MODE*
1: HI-SPEED
2: NORMAL
• If the memory fills up when twosided copying is performed,
"NORMAL" can be selected to
make copying possible.
However, "NORMAL" results in a
slower copying speed. Normally
"HI-SPEED" is selected to
enable fast two-sided copying.
12
MARGIN WIDTH
1: 1/4"
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"
• Use this setting to set the
margin width.
13
MEM. FOR
PRINTER
1: 30%
2: 40%
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%
• Use this to change the
proportion of machine
memory used for printer
mode.
AUTO KEY
REPEAT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this setting to select
whether or not holding down a
key causes repeated input of
the key. For keys that normally
cause a set value to decrease
or increase when held down
(for example, the [
] key
(
) or [
] key (
)), this
program can be used to have
the set value not change
when the key is held down.
15
KEY PRESS TIME
1: NORMAL
2: 0.5 SEC.
3: 1.0 SEC.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.
• Use this setting to select how
long a key must be pressed
for the input to be accepted.
By selecting a longer time,
you can prevent settings from
being changed by the
accidental pressing of a key.
16
KEY TOUCH
SOUND
1: LOW
2: HIGH
3: OFF
• This sets the volume of beep
signals. (p.60)
17
SOUND AT
DEFAULT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this to sound a beep
when a base setting is
selected. (p.60)
1: ON
2: OFF
• This mode reduces toner
usage by about 10% when
copying. Toner save mode is
effective when the exposure
mode is AUTO or TEXT.
14
18
TONER SAVE
MODE
* AR-208D only
56
Setting codes
(factory default
setting appears
in bold)
!007-user settings.fm 57 ページ
2007年12月20日 木曜日 午前10時21分
USER SETTINGS
Program
number
19
Program name
Setting codes
(factory default
setting appears
in bold)
1: SPF/RSPF
(Adjustment to
5 levels is
possible.)
AE LEVEL ADJUST 2: DOCUMENT
GLASS
(Adjustment to
5 levels is
possible.)
Explanation
• This is used to adjust the
exposure level.
• The automatic exposure level can
be adjusted separately for the
document glass and the RSPF.
• For the procedure for adjusting
the exposure and guidelines
for numeric values, see page
24. The factory default setting
for the exposure level is center.
20
LANGUAGE
1: AMERICAN
ENGLISH
2: ENGLISH
3: FRENCH
4: SPANISH
21
RESET FACTORY
1: YES
2: NO
• This is used to return all settings
to the factory default settings.
22
SORT AUTO
SELECT
1: ON
2: OFF
• Use this setting to enable or
disable sort auto select mode.
1: ON
2: OFF
• You can set the operation that
takes place if the [START] key
(
) is pressed when the
RSPF is not completely closed.
(For details on the "Check RSPF
open function", see page 13.)
1: 8.5x11
2: 5.5x8.5
• Set the allowed paper sizes
for copying from the bypass
tray. When "5.5x8.5" is
selected, a copy of a letter
size original will only be
printed up to invoice size.
LSU SETTING
1: ON
2: OFF
• Select whether copying is only
allowed when the polygon
motor is rotating, or also when
the polygon motor is stopped.
PAPER TYPE
1: PLAIN PAPER
2: HEAVY PAPER
• Set the temperature of the
fusing unit when the bypass
tray is used. Normally "PLAIN
PAPER" should be selected.
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
1: LIGHTER
2: LIGHT
3: NORMAL
4: DARK
5: DARKER
• Set the contrast of the display.
24
25
28
29
30
CHECK RSPF
OPEN
VALID COPY
WIDTH
• This is used to set the
language used in the display.
7
57
!AR-208S_208D.book
58 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USER SETTINGS
Print mode
Program
number
1
2
3
Program name
Setting codes
(factory default
setting appears
in bold)
Explanation
• When this function is enabled,
printing in printer mode will
automatically continue using a
different size of paper if the
specified size of paper runs
out in all trays. This feature
does not function in copy
mode.
FORCED
OUTPUT
1: ON
2: OFF
USB 2.0 MODE
SWITCH*1
• This sets the USB 2.0 data
transfer speed. To obtain the
fastest speed when using the
USB 2.0 connector, first verify
that your computer meets the
system requirements
(operating system and driver),
and then use this program to
1: FULL-SPEED
change the USB 2.0 mode to
2: HI-SPEED
"Hi-Speed". Note that the
setting should not be changed
while running a TWAIN driver.
(For the system requirements,
see "System requirements for
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed mode)"
(p.49).)
AUTO TRAY
SWITCH*2
1: ON
2: OFF
• If the paper runs out during
printing and there is paper of
the same size in another tray,
this function automatically
switches to that tray
(excluding the bypass tray).
The function can be disabled.
*1 The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED",
however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.
*2 When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
58
!AR-208S_208D.book
59 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
SELECTING A SETTING FOR A USER PROGRAM
1
Press the [MENU] key and then press the
[ENTER] key.
MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed
by simply pressing the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select the item that you wish to configure
in the USER PROGRAM items, and then
press the [ENTER] key.
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE
• See "USER PROGRAM" (p.54 to p.58)
for the program name and program
code.
• You can also select a program by
directly entering the program number
with the numeric keys.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
change the setting of the selected item.
PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN
See "USER PROGRAM" (p.54 to p.58) for the
program code.
Note
4
• If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key
(
) and repeat the procedure from step 2.
• To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ENTER] key.
7
Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen appears.
Note
When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the
[ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen
appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [ENTER] key.
59
!AR-208S_208D.book
60 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
USER SETTINGS
Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep)
The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key entry beep that
sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key beep that sounds when an
invalid key is pressed, and a base setting beep that sounds when a setting is the
same as the base setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting
beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see
"SOUND AT DEFAULT" on page 56. If you wish to change the volume of the beep
signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND" on page 56.
The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:
Key entry beep..................... One beep
Base setting beep........... Three beeps
Invalid key beep............... Two beeps
Base settings
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy setting. The base
settings are as follows:
Copy ratio................................... 100%
Light and Dark level ................. Center
60
Paper feed location ................. Tray 1
(Upper paper tray)
AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO ................AUTO
!AR-208S_208D.book
8
61 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 8
TROUBLESHOOTING AND
MAINTENANCE
Problems related to general use of the machine, the copy function, and software
setup are explained here. Be sure to check the problem carefully before calling for
service, as many problems can be solved by the user.
If you are unable to solve the problem, turn off the main switch, unplug the power
cord from the outlet, and contact your dealer.
Note
For problems related to the printer and scanner functions, see the
online manual.
DISPLAY MESSAGES
When the following indicators light up or blink on the operation panel or the following
alphanumeric codes appear in the display, solve the problem immediately referring
to both the table below and the indicated page.
Note
Be sure to use only genuine SHARP parts and supplies.
Indication
Lamp indicator
Display
BYPASS : ADD
PAPER
Tray
TRAY<*>
: ADD
location Blinks
PAPER
indicator
CLOSE PAPER
TRAY<*>
CLEAR PAPER JAM.
SPF/RSPF JAM.
FRONT OR SIDE
COVER OPEN.
CLOSE COVERS.
CLOSE THE SPF/
RSPF COVER.
REPLACE THE
TONER CARTRIDGE.
Error
indicator Blinks
Cause and remedy
Page
The indicated paper tray is not
attached, is attached incorrectly, or has
run out of paper. (The tray is indicated
in <*>.)
15
A paper misfeed has occurred.
Remove the misfeed as explained in
"MISFEED REMOVAL".
70
The cover is open. Close the cover.
-
The RSPF cover is open. Close the
RSPF cover.
The toner cartridge is empty. Replace
the toner cartridge with a new cartridge.
When [L1-00] appears, the scan head
locking switch is locked. Turn off the
power, release the scan head locking
switch, and turn the power back on.
When [F2-02] appears, check the toner
SYSTEM ERROR cartridge and make sure that the seal
[XX - XX] REFER is not still affixed.
TO USER GUIDE The machine will not function. Turn the
power switch off, wait about 10 seconds,
and then turn on the switch again. If this
does not clear the error, remove the
power cord from the outlet, and contact
your SHARP service center.
74
76
8
-
-
61
!AR-208S_208D.book
62 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Indication
Lamp indicator
Display
INSTALL A TONER
Blinks CARTRIDGE.
TONER
Error
CARTRIDGE IS
indicator Steadily NEAR EMPTY.
lit
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED CALL
FOR SERVICE
MEMORY FULL, PRESS START TO
RESUME.
NO 2-SIDED COPY FROM BYPASS
TRAY.
Cause and remedy
Page
The toner cartridge is not installed
correctly. Reinstall the toner cartridge.
74
Replacement of toner cartridge will be
needed soon. Prepare a new cartridge.
74
Service by an authorized SHARP
service technician is required.
Data is being held in memory. Print the
data or clear it from memory.
Two sided printing or 2 IN 1 copying is
selected when the bypass tray is
already selected ,or the bypass tray is
selected when two-sided printing or 2
IN 1 copying is already selected.
NO 2IN1 COPY FROM
The bypass tray cannot be used. Press
BYPASS TRAY.
the [TRAY SELECT] key (
) to select
a paper tray.
2 IN 1 copy and margin shift cannot be
NO 2IN1 COPY WITH MARGIN SHIFT. used in combination. Cancel the
function that was selected last.
COPY RATIO CAN NOT BE
Copy ratio can not be changed in 2 IN
CHANGED IN 2IN1.
1 copy.
This
appears if you attempt to change
THIS MENU IS NOT SELECTABLE
a user program setting while a print job
WITH DATA.
is in progress.
There is no paper for printing. Press
the [MODE SELECT] key to switch to
printer mode and follow the instructions
NO XXXX SIZE TRAY
in the display.
("XXXX" indicates paper size)
An original remains on the document
glass, or the original is too thick to
scan. Remove the original.
If the message is not cleared when
CHECK SPF/RSPF.
there is no original on the document
START TO RESUME.
glass, the underside of the RSPF is
dirty. Clean the underside of the RSPF.
(especially areas where black lines
appear.)
Printing is not possible if the paper size
setting is different from the size of
paper loaded in the tray. Load the
LOAD XXXX PAPER INTO TRAY<*>. same size of paper as the paper size
setting and then press the [START] key
( ). Printing will begin.
("XXXX" indicates paper size. The tray
is indicated in <*>.)
The machine is not correctly connected
NO PC COMMUNICATION; CHECK
to the computer. Check the cable
CABLE.
(when using the scanner function).
62
30
26
31
31
34
25
31
54
-
21
78
15
42
!AR-208S_208D.book
63 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING THE MACHINE
The following problems are related to the general operation of the machine and
copying.
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The machine is not plugged into a
power outlet.
→ Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.
-
Power switch OFF.
→ Turn the power switch ON.
The machine does not
operate.
Copies are too dark or
too light.
Blank copies.
12
The power save indicator is blinking.
Indicates that the machine is warming
up.
→ Copies cannot be made until the
machine has finished warming up.
-
The front cover or the side cover is not
completely closed.
→ Close the front cover or the side cover.
-
The machine is in auto power shut-off
mode.
→ In auto power shut-off mode, all lights
are off except the power save indicator.
Press the [START] key (
) to resume
normal operation.
13
The scan head locking switch is locked.
→ Unlock the scan head locking switch.
76
Select the correct original type for the
original.
→ Select AUTO with the [EXPOSURE] key
or press the [
] key (
) or [
] key
(
) to manually select an appropriate
exposure.
→ If the copy is too light or too dark even
though AUTO was selected with the
[EXPOSURE] key, adjust the automatic
exposure level.
24
57
8
The original is not placed face up in the
RSPF or face down on the document
glass.
→ Place the original face up in the RSPF
or face down on the document glass.
20, 21
The scan head locking switch is locked.
→ Unlock the scan head locking switch.
76
63
!008-troubleshooting.fm
64 ページ
2007年12月20日 木曜日 午前10時31分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Problem
Cause and solution
The original was not placed in the
correct position.
→ Place the original correctly.
Part of the image is cut
off or there is too much
blank space.
Wrinkles appear in the
paper or the image
disappears in places.
Copies are smudged or
dirty.
64
Page
20, 21
An appropriate ratio was not used for
the size of the original and the size of
the paper.
→ Press the [COPY RATIO] key to change
the ratio to a setting that is suitable for
the original and the copy paper.
25
The size of paper loaded in the tray was
changed without changing the tray's
paper size setting.
→ Be sure to change the tray's paper size
setting whenever you change the size
of paper loaded in the tray.
19
The paper is outside of the specified
size and weight range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified
range.
14
Paper curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or crimped paper.
Replace with dry copy paper. During
periods when the machine is not used
for a long time, remove the paper from
the tray and store it in a dark place in a
bag to prevent moisture absorption.
-
The document glass or the underside of
the RSPF is dirty.
→ Clean regularly.
78
Original smudged or blotchy.
→ Use a clean original.
-
Images rub off the copy
easily.
The fusing temperature is not
appropriate.
→ In the user programs, set "PAPER
TYPE" (program 29) to "2 (HEAVY
PAPER)".
57
Printing is not uniform
between the edges of
the paper and the
center.
The fusing temperature is not
appropriate.
→ In the user programs, set "PAPER
TYPE" (program 29) to "1 (PLAIN
PAPER)".
57
!AR-208S_208D.book
65 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
Misfeed occur.
→ To remove the misfeed, see "MISFEED
REMOVAL".
70
The paper is outside of the specified
size and weight range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified
range.
14
Paper curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or crimped paper.
Replace with dry copy paper. During
periods when the machine is not used
for a long time, remove the paper from
the tray and store it in a dark place in a
bag to prevent moisture absorption.
Paper misfeed.
White or black lines
appear on copies.
-
Paper is not loaded properly.
→ Make sure that the paper is properly
loaded.
15
Pieces of paper inside machine.
→ Remove all pieces of misfed paper.
71
Too much paper is loaded in the tray.
→ If the stack of paper is higher than the
indicator line on the tray, remove some
of the paper and reload so that the
stack does not exceed the line.
15
Some sheets of paper stick together.
→ Fan the paper well before loading it.
15
The guides on the bypass tray do not
match the width of the paper.
→ Adjust the guides to match the width of
the paper.
18
The bypass tray extension is not
opened.
→ When loading a large size of paper,
open the extension.
18
The scanner glass for the RSPF is dirty.
→ Clean the long, narrow scanning
window.
78
The transfer charger is dirty.
→ Clean the transfer charger.
79
8
65
!AR-208S_208D.book
66 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Problem
Cause and solution
Copying or printing is performed.
→ Set the paper size after copying or
printing is complete.
Paper size for a paper
tray cannot be set.
Output does not stack
neatly in the paper
output tray.
A copy job stops before
it is finished.
The power save
indicator is lit.
Error indicator (
lit or blinking.
) is
Lighting fixture flickers.
66
Page
-
The machine has stopped temporarily
due to running out of paper or a
misfeed.
→ Load paper or remove the misfeed, and
then set the paper size.
19, 70
Both ends of the paper are curled
upward.
→ Turning the paper over in the paper tray
may help.
15
"MEMORY FULL, PRESS START TO
RESUME." appears in the display.
→ The memory became full during sort
copy. Copy only the originals that have
been scanned to that point, or cancel
the job and clear the data from memory.
30
The tray is out of paper.
→ Load paper.
15
Other indicators are lit.
→ If other indicators are lit, the machine is
in preheat mode. Press any key on the
operation panel to resume normal
operation.
13
Only the power save indicator is lit.
→ If only the power save indicator is lit, the
machine is in auto power shut-off
mode. Press the [START] key (
) to
resume normal operation.
13
See "DISPLAY MESSAGES" to check the
meaning of the error indicator and error
message in the display, and take
appropriate action.
61
The same power outlet is used for the
lighting fixture and the machine.
→ Connect the machine to a power outlet
which is not used for other electric
appliances.
-
!AR-208S_208D.book
67 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
PROBLEMS DURING SETUP OF THE SOFTWARE
If the software does not install correctly, check the following items on your computer.
To remove the software, see "Removing the software" (p.69).
MFP driver cannot be installed (Windows 2000/XP)
If the MFP driver cannot be installed in Windows 2000/XP, follow these steps to
check your computer's settings.
1
Click the "start" button and then click "Control Panel".
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click
"Control Panel".
2
Click "Performance and Maintenance", and then click
"System".
In Windows 2000, double-click the "System" icon.
3
Click the "Hardware" tab and then click the "Driver Signing"
button.
4
Check "What action do you want
Windows to take?" ("File
signature verification" in
Windows 2000).
If "Block" has been selected, it will not
be possible to install the MFP driver.
Select "Warn" and then install the MFP
driver as explained in "INSTALLING
THE SOFTWARE".
8
67
!AR-208S_208D.book
68 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Plug and play screen does not appear
If the Plug and Play screen does not appear after you connect the machine to your
computer with a USB cable and turn on the machine, follow the steps below to verify
that the USB port is available.
1
Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", and then click
"Performance and Maintenance".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel", and then
click "System and Maintenance".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Control Panel".
2
Click "System", click the "Hardware" tab, and click the "Device
Manager" button.
"Universal Serial Bus controllers" will appear in the list of devices.
Note
3
• In Windows 98/Me, double-click the "System" icon and click the
"Device Manager" tab.
• In Windows 2000, double-click the "System" icon, click the
"Hardware" tab, and click the "Device Manager" button.
• In Windows Vista, click the "Device Manager", and if a message
screen appears asking you for confirmation, click "Continue".
• If the "System" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all
Control Panel options".
Click the
icon beside "Universal Serial Bus controllers".
Two items should appear: your controller chipset type and Root Hub. If
these items appear, you can use the USB port. If the "Universal Serial Bus
controllers" shows a yellow exclamation point or does not appear, you must
check your computer manual for USB troubleshooting or contact your
computer manufacturer.
4
68
Once you have verified that the USB port is enabled, install the
software as explained in "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE".
!AR-208S_208D.book
69 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
The MFP driver cannot be correctly installed by Plug and
Play (Windows 2000/XP/Vista)
In Windows 2000/XP/Vista, if the MFP driver cannot be correctly installed by Plug
and Play (for example, Plug and Play takes place without copying the required files
for the MFP driver installation), follow these steps to remove unneeded devices and
then install the MFP driver as explained in "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" (p.36).
1
Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", and then click
"Performance and Maintenance".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel", and then
click "System and Maintenance".
• In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click
"Control Panel".
2
Click "System", click the "Hardware" tab, and click the "Device
Manager" button.
Note
3
• In Windows 2000, double-click the "System" icon, click the
"Hardware" tab, and click the "Device Manager" button.
• In Windows Vista, click the "Device Manager", and if a message
screen appears asking you for confirmation, click "Continue".
Click the
devices".
icon beside "Other
If "AR-XXXX" and "SHARP ARXXXX" appear, select and delete
both of these items.
Note
4
If "Other devices" does not appear, close the "Device Manager" window.
Install the software as explained in "INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE".
Removing the software
If you need to remove the software, follow these steps.
1
Click the "start" button and then click "Control Panel".
In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then
click "Control Panel".
2
8
Click "Add or Remove Programs".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Uninstall a program".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click the "Add/Remove Programs" icon.
3
Select "SHARP AR-208 Series MFP Driver" and Button Manager
from the list, and remove the software.
For more information, refer to your operating manual or to the help files for
your operating system.
69
!AR-208S_208D.book
70 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MISFEED REMOVAL
When a misfeed occurs, the error indicator blinks, "CLEAR PAPER JAM" appears in
the display, and the machine stops operating. If a misfeed occurs when using the
RSPF, "RETURN X ORIGINAL(S) START TO RESUME" will appear in the display.
("X" indicates the number of pages to be returned.). This indicates the number of the
originals that must be returned to the document feeder tray after a misfeed. Return
the required number of originals. This number will be cleared when copying is
resumed or the [CLEAR] key (
) is pressed. If an original misfeed occurs in the
RSPF, the machine will stop and the error indicator will blink. To remove a misfeed
from the RSPF, see "D: Misfeed in the RSPF" (p.73).
1
Open the bypass tray, and
then open the side cover.
2
Check the misfeed location. Remove the misfed paper
following the instructions for each location in the illustration
below. If the error indicator blinks, proceed to "A: Misfeed in
the paper feed area" (p.71).
If the misfed paper is seen from
this side, proceed to "C: Misfeed
in the transport area". (p.72)
If paper is misfed here, proceed to "B:
Misfeed in the fusing area". (p.71)
If paper is misfed here, proceed to "A:
Misfeed in the paper feed area". (p.71)
70
!AR-208S_208D.book
71 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
A: Misfeed in the paper feed area
1
Gently remove the misfed paper from the paper feed area as
shown in the illustration. If the error indicator blinks and the
misfed paper is not visible in the paper feed area, pull out the
paper tray and remove the misfed paper. If the paper cannot be
removed, proceed to "B: Misfeed in the fusing area".
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch the fusing unit when
Warning removing misfed paper. Doing so may cause a burn or other
injury.
Caution
2
• Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion) when
removing the misfed paper. Doing so may damage the drum and
cause smudges on copies.
• If the paper has been fed through the bypass tray, do not remove the
misfed paper through the bypass tray. Toner on the paper may stain
the paper transport area, resulting in smudges on copies.
Close the side cover by pressing the round projections near
the side cover open button. The error indicator will go out and
the ready indicator will light up.
B: Misfeed in the fusing area
1
Lower the fusing unit release
lever.
Fusing unit release lever
8
71
!AR-208S_208D.book
72 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
2
Gently remove the misfed paper
from under the fusing unit as shown
in the illustration. If the paper cannot
be removed, proceed to "C: Misfeed
in the transport area".
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch the fusing unit when
Warning removing misfed paper. Doing so may cause a burn or other
injury.
Caution
3
• Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion) when
removing the misfed paper. Doing so may damage the drum and
cause smudges on copies.
• Do not remove the misfed paper from above the fusing unit. Unfixed
toner on the paper may stain the paper transport area, resulting in
smudges on copies.
Raise the fusing unit release lever and then close the side
cover by pressing the round projections near the side cover
open button. The error indicator will go out and the ready
indicator will light up.
C: Misfeed in the transport area
1
Lower the fusing unit release lever.
See "B: Misfeed in the fusing area" (p.71).
2
Open the front cover.
To open the front cover, see "TONER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT"
(p.74).
3
72
Rotate the roller rotating
knob in the direction of the
arrow and gently remove the
misfed paper from the exit
area.
Roller rotating
knob
!AR-208S_208D.book
73 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
4
Raise the fusing unit release lever, close the front cover and
then close the side cover by pressing the round projections
near the side cover open button. The error indicator will go out
and the ready indicator will light up.
When closing the covers, be sure to close the front cover securely and
Caution then close the side cover. If the covers are closed in the wrong order,
the covers may be damaged.
D: Misfeed in the RSPF
If the misfed original is at the top of the document feeder tray or in the exit area,
follow procedure (A) to remove the misfeed. If the misfed original is inside the
document feeder and is not visible, follow procedure (B).
(A) If the misfed original is at the top of the document feeder tray or in the exit
area, open the document feeder cover and pull out the original. If the
original resists your pulling, press down on the RSPF jam release lever
while pulling out the original. When finished, close the document feeder
cover.
Document feeder cover
RSPF jam release lever
(B) Open the document feeder cover. Next, open the RSPF and rotate the roller
in the direction of the arrow. If the misfed original is in the state (X), pull the
original out as it feeds out into the exit area. If the misfed original is in the
state (Y), pull the original down and out. When finished, lower the RSPF
and close the document feeder cover.
Roller
8
(X)
(Y)
Note
Open and close the RSPF to clear the error indicator. "RETURN X
ORIGINAL(S) START TO RESUME" will appear in the display. Return
the indicated number of pages to the document feeder tray. Press the
[START] key (
) to resume copying.
73
!AR-208S_208D.book
74 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TONER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
When toner is low, the error indicator will light up and "TONER CARTRIDGE IS
NEAR EMPTY." will appear in the display to alert you to purchase a new toner
cartridge. If copying is continued while the indicator is lit, copies will gradually
become lighter until the toner runs out. When the toner runs out, the machine will
stop operating, the error indicator will blink, and "REPLACE THE TONER
CARTRIDGE" will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to replace the
toner cartridge.
Note
74
• After the machine stops, it may be possible to make a few more
copies by taking the toner cartridge out of the machine, shaking it
horizontally, then reinstalling it. If copying is not possible after this
operation, replace the toner cartridge.
• During a long copy run of a dark original, "TONER
REPLENISHMENT IN PROGRESS" appears in the display, and the
machine may stop even though toner is left. The machine will feed
toner up to 2 minutes and then the ready indicator will light up. Press
the [START] key (
) to resume copying.
1
Open the bypass tray, and
then open the side cover
while pressing the side
cover open button.
2
Push gently on both sides of
the front cover to open the
cover.
!AR-208S_208D.book
75 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
3
Gently pull the toner
cartridge out while pressing
the lock release lever.
Note
4
Toner cartridge lock release lever
• After removing the toner cartridge, do not shake it or tap on it. Doing
so may cause toner to leak from the cartridge. Put the old cartridge
immediately in the bag contained in the box of the new cartridge.
• Dispose of the old toner cartridge in accordance with local
regulations.
Remove the toner cartridge from the bag. Grasp the cartridge
on both sides and shake it horizontally four or five times. After
shaking the cartridge, remove the toner seal.
4 or 5 times
Shutter
Toner seal
Note
5
Grasp the toner cartridge as shown in the illustration. Do not hold the
cartridge by the shutter. Be sure to only shake the cartridge before the
toner seal is removed.
Gently insert the toner cartridge
along the guides until it locks in
place while pushing the lock release
lever. Remove the tape from the
shutter. Pull the shutter out of the
toner cartridge as shown in the
illustration. Discard the shutter.
8
75
!AR-208S_208D.book
76 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
6
Close the front cover and
then the side cover by
pressing the round
projections near the side
cover open button. The error
indicator will go out and the
ready indicator will light up.
7
When closing the covers, be sure to close the front cover securely and
Caution then close the side cover. If the covers are closed in the wrong order,
the covers may be damaged.
Note
Even after a new toner cartridge is installed, the start (
) indicator
may not light up, indicating copying cannot be restarted (toner is not
sufficiently fed). In this case, open and close the side cover. The copier
will feed toner again approximately 2 minutes and then copying can be
restarted.
SCAN HEAD LOCKING SWITCH
The scan head locking switch is under the original table. If the switch is locked (
the machine will not operate. Unlock the switch (
) as shown below.
),
Grasp here and turn in
the direction of the arrow.
A
Lock
Unlock
To lock the scan head locking switch, hold up the catch in illustration A and turn the
center knob counter-clockwise 90 degrees until you hear a click.
76
!AR-208S_208D.book
77 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CHECKING THE TOTAL COUNT
You can check the total number of pages output by the machine (all pages printed by
the copy function and printer function), as well as the output counts of each function
(number of copies, number of scanned pages, number of faxes, etc.). When a count
reaches 999,999 it returns to 0.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "TOTAL COUNT" appears, and then
press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
display the count of each function.
) to
MAIN MENU
3:TOTAL COUNT
TOTAL OUTPUT
The count of each function changes as follows each the [
[
] key (
)is pressed:
• "TOTAL OUTPUT":
• "COPIES":
• "SPF/RSPF":
• "2-SIDED PRINT":*1
• "PRINTS":
•
•
•
•
"FAX":*2
"FAX SEND":*2
"SCAN SEND":
"TONER REMAINING":
012,345
] key (
) or
Total number of pages output by the machine
Total number of copies
Total number of pages scanned using the
RSPF
Total number of pages printed by two-sided
print
Total number of pages printed the printer
function
Total number of sent and received faxes
Total number of sent faxes
Total number of scans
The approximate amount of toner remaining
in the toner cartridge is displayed as a
percentage.
*1 AR-208D only
*2 When the optional Facsimile Expansion Kit is installed.
8
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
When the error indicator will blink and "MAINTENANCE REQUIRED CALL FOR
SERVICE" will appear in the display, service by an authorized SHARP service
technician is required. Contact your service center as soon as possible.
77
!AR-208S_208D.book
78 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
CLEANING THE MACHINE
Proper care is essential in order to get clean, sharp copies. Be sure to take a few
minutes to clean the machine on a regular basis.
Do not spray flammable cleaner gas. Gas from the spray may
Warning come in contact with the internal electrical components or hightemperature parts of the fusing unit, creating a risk of fire or
electrical shock.
Caution
• Before cleaning, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove
the power cord from the outlet.
• Do not use thinner, benzene or other volatile cleaning agents.
Doing so may cause deformation, discoloration, deterioration or
malfunction.
Cabinet
Wipe the cabinet with a soft, clean cloth.
Document glass and the back side of the RSPF
Stains on the glass, RSPF scanning window, cover or RSPF roller will also be
copied. Wipe the glass, RSPF scanning window, cover and RSPF roller with a soft,
clean cloth. If necessary, dampen the cloth with a glass cleaner.
Document glass/scanning window
RSPF
RSPF roller
RSPF scanning window
Black line
If this area is dirty, copying from the RSPF will
not be possible.
78
!AR-208S_208D.book
79 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Transfer charger
1
Turn the power switch off. (p.13)
2
Ensure that the bypass tray is open and then open the side
cover while pressing the side cover open button.
3
Take the charger cleaner out by holding the tab. Set the charger
cleaner onto the right end of the transfer charger, gently slide
the cleaner to the left end, and then remove it. Repeat this
operation two or three times.
Note
Slide the charger cleaner from the right end to the left end along the
groove of the transfer charger. If the cleaner is stopped on the way,
smudges on copies may occur.
4
Return the charger cleaner
to its original position.
Close the side cover by
pressing the round
projections near the side
cover open button.
5
Turn the power switch on. (p.12)
8
79
!009-troubleshooting.fm
9
80 ページ
2007年12月14日 金曜日 午前8時56分
Chapter 9
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A number of options are available for the unit which allow you to configure a system
to meet your particular needs. The options include the following.
Note
Be sure to use only genuine SHARP parts and supplies.
For best copying results, be sure to use only SHARP Genuine Supplies
which are designed, engineered and tested to maximize the life and
performance of SHARP copiers. Look for the Genuine Supplies label on
the toner package.
Facsimile
Expansion Kit
(AR-FX13)
Network
Expansion Kit
(AR-NB2 A)
250-sheet paper
feed unit (AR-D33)
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT (AR-FX13)
This allows the machine to be used as a facsimile machine.
NETWORK EXPANSION KIT (AR-NB2 A)
This allows the machine to be used as a network printer/network scanner.
PS3 EXPANSION KIT (AR-PK1N)
This allows the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible printer.
250-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D33)
The paper feed unit provide the convenience of increased paper capacity for the unit
and a greater choice of paper size readily available for copying.
The procedures for loading paper in the
paper tray of paper feed unit, changing
the paper size, and selecting the paper
tray are same as for the paper tray in the
unit. See "LOADING THE PAPER
TRAY" (p.15) and "SELECTING THE
TRAY" (p.23).
Tray
80
Lower side cover
!AR-208S_208D.book
81 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Using the AR-D33 with the printer function
To use the AR-D33 with the printer function, follow these steps to adjust the settings
in the printer driver.
Note
The printer driver cannot be set for use with the AR-D33 when opened
from the application.
1
Click the "start" button.
2
Click "Control Panel", select "Printer and Other Hardware", and
then click "Printer and Faxes".
• In Windows Vista, click "Control Panel", and then click "Printer".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, select "Setting" and click "Printers".
3
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon and from the
"File" menu select "Properties".
• In Windows Vista, from the "Organize" menu select "Properties".
• In Windows 98/Me, click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon, select
"Properties" from the "File" menu, and then click the "Setup" tab.
4
Click the "Configuration" tab.
5
Select "Two trays" for "Input tray
option", and click "OK".
The printer driver closes. This completes
the settings needed to use the AR-D33.
Interface cable
Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer.
USB interface cable
USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
9
81
!AR-208S_208D.book
10
82 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
Chapter 10
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AR-208S
Type
Digital Multifunctional System, Desktop
Photoconductive
type
OPC drum
Document glass
type
Fixed
Copy/printing
system
Dry, electrostatic transfer
Originals
Sheets, bound documents
Originals size
Max. 8-1/2" x 14"
Copy size
Max. 8-1/2" x 14"
Min. 3-1/2" x 5-1/2"
Image loss: Max. 11/64" (4 mm) (leading and trailing edges)
Max. 3/16" (4.5 mm) (along other edges in total)
Copying speed*1
20 copies/min.
(8-1/2" x 11", one-sided copying at 100% copy ratio)
Continuous copy
Max. 99 copies; subtractive counter
First-copy
82
time*2
AR-208D
8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF)
10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)
(paper: 8-1/2" x 11", exposure mode: AUTO,
copy ratio: 100%)
Warm-up time*3
Approx. 0 sec.
Copy ratio
Document glass:
Variable: 25% to 400% in 1% increments (total 376 steps)
Fixed preset: 25%, 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%, 129%, 200%,
400%
RSPF:
Variable: 50% to 200% in 1% increments (total 151 steps)
Fixed preset: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%, 129%, 200%
Exposure system
Document glass: Moving optical source, slit exposure
(stationary platen) with automatic
exposure function
RSPF:
Moving original
Paper feed
One automatic feeding paper tray (250 sheets) + bypass tray
(50 sheets)
!010-appendix.fm
83 ページ
2007年12月20日 木曜日 午前8時51分
APPENDIX
Fusing system
Heat rollers
Developer system
Magnetic brush development
Light source
Cold cathode fluorescent lamp
(CCD: 3 components; R, G, and B)
Resolution
Scan: 600 x 300 dpi Output: 600 x 600 dpi(AUTO/TEXT mode)
Scan: 600 x 600 dpi Output: 600 x 600 dpi(PHOTO mode)
Gradation
256 tones (8 bits)
Power supply
120 V, 60 Hz, 8.0 A
Power consumption Max. 1.0 kW
Space requirements
31.6" (W) x 17.6" (D) (802 mm (W) x 445 mm (D))
(with trays extended)
Weight*4
Approx. 43.9 lbs. (19.9 kg)
Dimensions
20.4" (W) x 17.6" (D) x 14.6" (H)
(518 mm (W) x 445 mm (D) x 371 mm (H))
Operating
conditions
Temperature: 50°F to 86°F (10°C to 30°C)
Humidity: 20% to 85%
Noise level
Sound Power Level LwA(1B=10dB)
Copying: 6.2[B]
Standby: 3.2[B]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (bystander positions)
Copying: 48[dB(A)]
Standby: 17[dB(A)]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (operator position)
Copying: 52[dB(A)]
Standby: 17[dB(A)]
Noise emission measurement in accordance with ISO 7779.
Emission
concentration
(measured
according to RALUZ62 : Edition Jan.
2002)
Ozone: 0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust:
0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene: 0.07 mg/m3 or less
Approx. 45.4 lbs. (20.6 kg)
*1 When making multiple duplex copies, the copy speed will vary based on the
environment conditions.
*2 The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following
power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready
state and "LSU SETTING" set to ON in the user programs (8-1/2" x 11", paper fed
from paper tray).
The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and
ambient conditions such as temperature.
The time from power off until the first copy is output varies depending on the
installation site and the state of the machine in use.
*3 The warm-up time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and
ambient conditions such as temperature.
*4 Not including toner cartridges.
10
83
!010-appendix.fm
84 ページ
2007年12月4日 火曜日 午後5時8分
APPENDIX
Printer Function
Print speed*
20 ppm
Resolution
600 dpi
Memory
Approx. 30 MB
Emulation
SPLC (Sharp Printer Language with Compression)
Interface
USB 2.0 (Full-Speed/Hi-Speed compatible interface)
Interface cables
[USB cable]
USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
Please purchase a commercially available USB cable.
* When printing same document continuously on 8-1/2" x 11" plain paper in nonoffset mode, excluding processing time.
84
!010-appendix.fm
85 ページ
2007年12月20日 木曜日 午前8時51分
APPENDIX
Scanner Function
Type
Flatbed scanner
Scanning method
Document glass/RSPF
Light source
Cold cathode fluorescent lamp
(CCD: 3 components; R, G, and B)
Resolution
Basic: 600 dpi x 1200 dpi
Setting range: 50dpi - 9600dpi
Original types
Sheet media, books
Effective scanning
area
8.5" (216 mm) (Lengthwise) x 14" (356 mm) (Width)
Scanning speed
2.88 msec/line
Input Data
1 bit or 12 bit
Output Data
R.G.B 1 or 8 bits / pixel / A/D 16 bit
Scanning colors
Black and white 2 value, Grayscale, Full color
Protocol
TWAIN
WIA (Windows XP/Vista only)
STI
Interface
USB 2.0 (Full-Speed/Hi-Speed compatible interface)
Drop out color
Yes
Supported
operating systems
Windows 98/Me/2000 Professional/XP/Vista
(Detailed information can be found in "BEFORE
INSTALLATION" (p.37))
Void area
None
Interface cables
[USB cable]
USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
Please purchase a commercially available USB cable.
Scanner utilities
Button Manager / Sharpdesk
10
85
!AR-208S_208D.book
86 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
APPENDIX
250-sheet paper feed unit (AR-D33)
Paper size
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 14"
Paper weight
15 lbs. to 21 lbs. (56g/m2 to 80g/m2 )
Paper capacity
One paper tray with capacity for 250 sheets of 21 lbs. bond
paper
Weight
6.6 lbs. (3kg)
Dimensions
19.5" (W) x 15.6" (D) x 3.5" (H)
(495mm (W) x 395mm (D) x 88mm (H))
Power supply
Drawn from the unit
Note
86
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves
the right to make design and specification changes for product
improvement without prior notice. The performance specification
figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There may
be some deviations from these values in individual units.
!AR-208S_208D.book
87 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 1/4
Date Issued : Nov. 1, 2007
MSDS No. F-01601
1.PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name
: AR-208NT/ AR-208T (Black Toner)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
(Name and Telephone Number)
U.S.A.
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
: 1-800-237-4277
North
Emergency telephone number
: 1-800-255-3924
America
Canada
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
: 905-890-2100
Emergency telephone number
: 1-800-255-3924
Australia
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
Oceania
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
Telephone number for information
: 1300-13-50-22
Germany
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
: 040-2376-2185
For more information
: 040-2376-2613
United
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Kingdom
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
France
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 01-49-90-34-00
Austria
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
: 01-727-19-0
Europe
Italy
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 02895951
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
Netherlands
Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
: 30-6359500
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
: 08-634-36-00
Switzerland
Sharp Electronics(Schweiz)AG
Telephone number for information
: 01-846-6111
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
Middle
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
East
Telephone number for information
: 04-815311
2.COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
CAS No.
Proportion
OSHA PEL
Ingredient
29497-14-1
85-95%
Not listed
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
1333-86-4
5-10%
3.5mg/m3
Carbon black
Not listed
1309-38-2
1-5%
Iron oxide
0.5mg/m3
Metal Complex dye*
109125-51-1
< 2%
84179-66-8
ACGIH TLV
Not listed
MAK-TWA
Not listed
3.5mg/m3
Not listed
0.5mg/m3
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
NOHSC-TWA
Not listed
3mg/m3
Not listed
Not listed
* EC N0. : 400-110-2, Symbol letter : F,N , R Phrase : R11, R50/53
87
!AR-208S_208D.book
88 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 2/4
Date Issued : Nov. 1, 2007
MSDS No. F-01601
3.HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do not
indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : Not toxic to aquatic organisms
[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe) : Not classified as dangerous
4.FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry : Inhalation?
Yes
Skin?
No
Ingestion?
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact : Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water. If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5.FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals
Special Fire Fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards
: Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an explosive
mixture.
6.ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
: None
Methods for Cleaning Up
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is
released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of creating a
dust explosion.
7.HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures
: None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long
term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures
: None
Storage Conditions
: Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products : None
88
!AR-208S_208D.book
89 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 3/4
Date Issued : Nov. 1, 2007
MSDS No. F-01601
8.EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
Exposure Limit Values
OSHA-PEL(USA)
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust), 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
ACGIH-TLV(USA)
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust), 3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9.PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State : Solid
Form : Powder
Color : Black
Ph
: Not applicable
Boiling / Melting Point
: Not applicable
Softening Point(°C)
: 100 - 130
Flash Point(°C)
: Not applicable
lgnition Point(°C )
: > 350
Explosion Properties
: No data
Density(g/cm³)
: 1.1 (bulk density : 0.35)
Solubility in Water
: Negligible
10.STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
Hazardous Decomposition Products
Further Information
Odor : odorless
: Stable
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
: CO, CO2 and NOX
: None
11.TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion(oral)
: LD50 > 2500mg/kg [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Inhalation
: No data
Eye irritation
: Not an irritant [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Skin irritation
: Not an irritant [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Skin sensitizer
: No sensitized [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Mutagenicity
: Negative (Ames Test) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Carcinogenicity : In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human
evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity. The
classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation
exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung. Studies
performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black
and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation
containing carbon black demonstrated no association between toner exposure and tumor
development in rats.
89
!AR-208S_208D.book
90 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Chronic Effect
Page : 4/4
Date Issued : Nov. 1, 2007
MSDS No. F-01601
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate degree of
lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration (16mg/m3) exposure
group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of the animals in the middle
(4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest (1mg/m3)
exposure group, the most relevant level to potential human exposures.
12.ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Ecotoxicity : On available data, toner is not harmful to aquatic organisms
[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
13.DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal, state
and local environmental regulations.
14.TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15.REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA(Toxic Substances Control Act) :
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA(Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance : None
311/312 Hazard Classification
: None
EU Information
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
: Not required
R-Phrase
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or
order under 76/769/EEC.
16.OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1
Flammability=1
Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
List of R phrases
: R11 : Highly flammable
R50/53 : Very toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in
the aquatic environment.
References
IARC(1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol. 65,
Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon, pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow, U.Mohr,
S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein(1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this
product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with
caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which
exist.
90
!AR-208S_208D.book
91 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 1/4
Date Issued : Nov.01, 2007
MSDS No. F-31601
1.PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name
: AR-208ND / AR-208DV (Black Developer)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
(Name and Telephone Number)
U.S.A.
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
: 1-800-237-4277
North
Emergency telephone number
: 1-800-255-3924
America
Canada
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
: 905-890-2100
Emergency telephone number
: 1-800-255-3924
Australia
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
Oceania
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
Telephone number for information
: 1300-13-50-22
Germany
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
: 040-2376-2185
For more information
: 040-2376-2613
United
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Kingdom
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
France
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 01-49-90-34-00
Austria
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
: 01-727-19-0
Europe
Italy
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 02895951
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
Netherlands
Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
: 30-6359500
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
: 08-634-36-00
Switzerland
Sharp Electronics(Schweiz)AG
Telephone number for information
: 01-846-6111
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
Middle
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
East
Telephone number for information
: 04-815311
2.COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
Ingredient
Iron powder
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
Carbon black
CAS No.
7439-89-6
29497-14-1
Proportion
85-95 %
5-10 %
1333-86-4
<1%
OSHA PEL
Not listed
Not listed
ACGIH TLV
Not listed
Not listed
MAK-TWA
Not listed
Not listed
3.5mg/m3
3.5mg/m3
Not listed
NOHSC-TWA
Not listed
Not listed
3mg/m3
91
!AR-208S_208D.book
92 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 2/4
Date Issued : Nov.01, 2007
MSDS No. F-31601
3.HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do not
indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : Not toxic to aquatic organisms
[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe) : Not classified as dangerous
4.FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry : Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
No
No
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact : Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water. If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5.FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals
Special Fire Fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards
: Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an explosive
mixture.
6.ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
: None
Methods for Cleaning Up
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is
released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of creating a
dust explosion.
7.HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures
: None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long
term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures
: None
Storage Conditions
: Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products : None
92
!AR-208S_208D.book
93 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Page : 3/4
Date Issued : Nov.01, 2007
MSDS No. F-31601
8.EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
Exposure Limit Values
OSHA-PEL(USA)
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust), 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
ACGIH-TLV(USA)
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust), 3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9.PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State : Solid
Form : Powder
Color : Black
Ph
: Not applicable
Boiling / Melting Point
: Not applicable
Flash Point(°C)
: Not applicable
lgnition Point(°C )
: No data
Explosion Properties
: No data
Density(g/cm³)
: 7.3 (bulk density : 2.0)
Solubility in Water
: Negligible
10.STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
Hazardous Decomposition Products
Further Information
Odor : odorless
: Stable
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
: CO, CO2 and NOX
: None
11.TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion(oral)
: LD50 > 2000mg/kg [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Inhalation
: No data
Eye irritation
: Not an irritant [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Skin irritation
: Not an irritant [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Skin sensitizer
: No sensitized [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Mutagenicity
: Negative (Ames Test) [Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
Carcinogenicity : In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human
evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity. The
classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation
exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung. Studies
performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black
and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation
containing carbon black demonstrated no association between toner exposure and tumor
development in rats.
93
!AR-208S_208D.book
94 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Chronic Effect
Page : 4/4
Date Issued : Nov.01, 2007
MSDS No. F-31601
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate degree of
lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration (16mg/m3) exposure
group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of the animals in the middle
(4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest (1mg/m3)
exposure group, the most relevant level to potential human exposures.
12.ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Ecotoxicity : On available data, toner is not harmful to aquatic organisms
[Estimated from the other product containing similar material]
13.DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal, state
and local environmental regulations.
14.TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15.REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA(Toxic Substances Control Act) :
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA(Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance : None
311/312 Hazard Classification
: None
EU Information
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
: Not required
R-Phrase
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or
order under 76/769/EEC.
16.OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1
Flammability=1
Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
References
IARC(1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol. 65,
Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon, pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow, U.Mohr,
S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein(1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this
product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with
caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which
exist.
94
!AR-208S_208D.book
95 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INDEX
Symbols
[
[
[
] key.......................... 10, 27, 29, 32
] key ........................................... 10
] key ........................................... 10
2
2 IN 1 copy ....................................... 31
250-sheet paper feed unit .......... 80, 86
[2-SIDED COPY] key ........... 10, 27, 28
[2-SIDED SCAN] key.................. 10, 28
A
About the operation manuals ............. 6
Appendix .......................................... 82
Audible signals ................................. 60
Auto clear ......................................... 12
Auto power shut-off mode ................ 13
Automatic two-sided copying............ 26
[CLEAR] key
............... 10, 20, 21, 23, 29, 30, 50, 70
Connecting the machine to your computer
- USB cable ................................... 42
Convenient copy functions ............... 26
Conventions used in this manual and
online manual ..................................... 6
[COPY RATIO] key..................... 11, 25
D
Display.............................................. 10
Display messages ............................ 61
Document feeder cover ................ 9, 73
Document feeder tray................... 9, 21
Document glass............................ 9, 31
E
Basic procedure for printing ............. 50
Before installation ............................. 37
Button Manager ................................ 36
Bypass feed...................................... 17
Bypass tray................. 9, 17, 18, 70, 74
Bypass tray paper guides ............. 9, 18
[ENTER] key..................................... 10
Envelopes......................................... 17
Environmental information.................. 4
Error indicator....................... 10, 61, 70
[E-SORT/SP.FUN] key
............................ 10, 29, 30, 31, 33, 34
Exit area ............................................. 9
[EXPOSURE] key....................... 10, 24
Exposure value guidelines ............... 24
C
F
Canceling a print job......................... 50
Capacity of paper output tray ........... 22
Caution
- Handling the machine.................... 4
- Label on the machine .................... 3
- Selecting an installation site .......... 3
- Using the machine......................... 3
Changing a tray's paper size
setting ............................................... 19
Charger cleaner............................ 9, 79
Checking the total count ................... 77
Cleaning the machine
- Cabinet ........................................ 78
- Document glass........................... 78
- RSPF........................................... 78
- RSPF scanning window .............. 78
- Transfer charger.......................... 79
[CLEAR ALL] key ................. 11, 12, 50
Facsimile expansion kit ..................... 80
Front cover ............................. 9, 72, 74
Fusing unit release lever ........ 9, 71, 72
B
H
Handles .............................................. 9
Hardware and software
requirements .................................... 37
How to place the original .................. 20
How to use the online manual .......... 53
95
!AR-208S_208D.book
96 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
I
O
Initial settings.................................... 12
Installing the software....................... 36
Interface cable .................................. 81
Introduction......................................... 6
Offset function during sort copy........ 30
Operation in copy, printer, and scanner
modes............................................... 52
Operation panel............................ 9, 10
Optional equipment .......................... 80
Original guides ............................. 9, 21
Original output tray extension....... 9, 22
Original types ................................... 24
L
Language setting ..............................
Loading paper ..................................
Loading paper in the bypass tray .....
Loading the paper tray .....................
Long edge ........................................
12
14
18
15
26
M
Main features...................................... 7
Maintenance ..................................... 61
Maintenance required....................... 77
Making copies .................................. 20
Margin shift ....................................... 34
Margin width ..................................... 56
[MENU] key ...................................... 10
MFP driver ........................................ 36
Misfeed removal
- Fusing area ................................. 71
- Paper feed area........................... 71
- RSPF........................................... 73
- Transport area............................. 72
Mode indicators ................................ 10
[MODE SELECT] key ....................... 10
N
Network expansion kit ...................... 80
Normal copying
- Document glass........................... 20
- RSPF........................................... 21
Numeric keys.............................. 10, 23
96
P
Paper................................................ 14
Paper holder arm.......................... 9, 22
Paper output tray................................ 9
Paper output tray extension ......... 9, 22
Paper tray..................................... 9, 15
Part names ......................................... 9
Photoconductive drum........................ 9
Plug and play screen does not
appear .............................................. 68
Power cord ......................................... 9
Power off .......................................... 13
Power on .......................................... 12
Power save indicator ........................ 10
Power save modes........................... 13
Power switch .......................... 9, 12, 13
Preheat mode................................... 13
Preparations ....................................... 9
Printer driver..................................... 36
Printer/scanner functions.................. 49
Problems during setup
of the software.................................. 67
!AR-208S_208D.book
97 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
R
T
Ready indicator .................... 11, 12, 76
Reduction/enlargement/zoom .......... 25
Removing the software..................... 69
Roller rotating knob .......................... 72
RSPF .................................................. 9
RSPF indicator ................................. 10
Toner cartridge ............................. 9, 74
Toner cartridge lock release lever .... 75
Toner cartridge replacement ............ 74
Transfer charger................................. 9
Tray location indicator ................. 10, 61
[TRAY SELECT] key ............ 10, 18, 23
Troubleshooting................................ 61
S
Scan head locking switch ................. 76
Scanner driver .................................. 36
Scanning from the operation panel .. 51
Scanning from your computer .......... 52
Selecting a setting for a user
program ............................................ 59
Selecting the tray.............................. 23
Setting the number of copies............ 23
Setting up button manager ............... 45
Sharpdesk ........................................ 36
Short edge ........................................ 26
Side cover .............................. 9, 70, 74
Side cover open button ...................... 9
Sort copy .......................................... 29
Special papers.................................. 15
Specifications ................................... 82
[START] key ......................... 11, 20, 21
System configuration ........................ 80
System requirements for USB 2.0 .... 49
U
USB connector ............................. 9, 42
User programs
- Copy mode .................................. 54
- Print mode ................................... 58
User settings .................................... 54
Using the manual ............................... 6
Using the printer mode ..................... 50
Using the scanner mode .................. 51
97
!AR-208S_208D.book
98 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
INDEX BY PURPOSE
Preparations
Connecting the computer
Paper, loading
- Bypass tray................................... 17
- Paper tray..................................... 15
Power, turn off ................................... 13
Power, turn on ................................... 12
Scan head locking switch,
releasing ............................................ 76
Tray's paper size, setting................... 19
User program, setting ........................ 54
Basic procedure for printing .............. 50
Button Manager, setting up
- Windows 98/Me/2000................... 47
- Windows XP/Vista ........................ 45
Installing the software........................ 38
Online manual, using......................... 53
Print job, canceling ............................ 50
Printer mode, using ........................... 50
Scanner mode, using ........................ 51
Scanning from your computer ........... 52
Scanning using the keys on
the machine....................................... 51
Making copies
Copying
- Document glass............................ 20
- RSPF............................................ 21
Enlarging/reducing copies ................. 25
Exposure, adjusting ........................... 24
Exposure, selecting ........................... 24
Setting the number of copies............. 23
Tray, selecting ................................... 23
Using convenient copy functions
2 IN 1 copying, using
- Document glass............................ 31
- RSPF............................................ 33
Automatic two-sided copying
- Document glass............................ 27
- RSPF............................................ 28
Margin shift, using ............................. 34
Sort copying, using
- Document glass............................ 29
- RSPF............................................ 30
98
Troubleshooting and maintenance
Checking the total count.................... 77
Cleaning the machine
- Cabinet ......................................... 78
- Document glass............................ 78
- RSPF............................................ 78
- Transfer charger........................... 79
Misfeeds, removing
- Fusing area .................................. 71
- RSPF............................................ 73
- Paper feed area............................ 71
- Transport area.............................. 72
Toner cartridge, replacing ................. 74
!AR-208S_208D.book
MEMO
62 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
!AR-208S_208D.book
MEMO
63 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
!AR-208S_208D.book
63 ページ
2007年12月3日 月曜日 午後3時33分
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
For users in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠ ♠
Notice for Users in U.S.A.
Declaration of Conformity
SHARP Digital Multifunctional System, AR-208S/AR-208D
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party: SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
TEL:
1-800-BE-SHARP
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and fluorescent lamp containing a small
amount of mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to
environmental consideration. For disposal or recycling information, please
contact your local authorities, the Electronics Industries Alliance:
www.eiae.org, the lamp recycling organization: www.lamprecycle.org or Sharp
at 1-800-BE-SHARP.
(For U.S.A. Only)
!000-Cover4.fm
1 ページ
2007年12月14日 金曜日 午前9時7分
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
1 Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1164.
www.sharpusa.com
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based
soy oil ink to help protect the environment.
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper
PRINTED IN CHINA
2007M
KS2
TINSE1862QSZZ
!AR-FX13_sec.book
1 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
MODEL
AR-FX13
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT
OPERATION MANUAL
Page
• INSTALLATION
• INITIAL SETTINGS
• CHOOSING SUITABLE
MEDIA
• HOW TO USE THE FAX
FUNCTION
• SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
• TROUBLESHOOTING
• APPENDIX
11
13
50
52
67
85
92
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
For users in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
●
●
●
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
1 ページ
♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠ ♠
!AR-FX13_sec.book
This product utilizes a CR coin Lithium battery which contains a Perchlorate
material. Special handling for this material may apply, California residents, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
Others, consult local environmental officers.
Caution
• Use only the line cable that was provided with the machine.
• To reduce the risk of fire, use only UL-Listed No.26 AWG or larger
telecommunication line cord.
Note
• This manual (fax function) describes the AR-208S/AR-208D model with
optional facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX13) installed. Depending on the
model you have and on the options installed, some of the illustrations in this
manual may be different, however, the basic operations are the same.
• This manual describes how to use the fax function of the machine.
Part names and functions shared with the copy function (for example, the
misfeed indicator and add paper indicator), are described in the Operation
Manual (for general information). For more information, please read the
Operation Manual (for general information).
• This operation manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the
"RSPF".
!AR-FX13_sec.book
i ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INTRODUCTION
TYPE OF SERVICE
This equipment may not be used on coin-operated (pay phone) phone service. Connection to party lines service is
subject to state tariffs. Contact your state's public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation
commission for more information.
ABOUT THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT OF 1991
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or
long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following steps:
See page 21 of this Operation Manual.
Important safety instructions
• If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your
telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.
• The AC power outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
• Do not install or use the machine near water, or when you are wet. Take care not to spill any liquids on the
machine.
• Save these instructions.
i
!AR-FX13_sec.book
ii ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
FCC Notice to users:
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.
On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company.
For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, your telephone company may disconnect your service
temporarily. If possible, They will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon
as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a compliant with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect
the operation of your equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If the equipment is causing harm to the
telephone network, your telephone company may ask you to disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If you have any questions or problems which cannot be solved by reading this manual, please contact
Sharp Electronics Corporation
1 Sharp Plaza,
Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
Telephone: 1-800-BE-SHARP
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product.
It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
details.
This equipment connects to the telephone network through a standard USOC RJ-11C network interface jack.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment.
If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
ii
!AR-FX13_sec.book
1 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... i
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE .................................................................................................................... 3
LIST OF FAX FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................................ 6
1
INSTALLATION
CONNECTIONS .............................................. 11
● CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE CORD ...11
FINAL PREPARATIONS ................................ 12
● CONNECTING OTHER DEVICES ................12
2
USING THE MACHINE WITH AN ANSWERING
MACHINE.........................................................48
● QUIET DETECT TIME .................................. 48
● ANSWERING MACHINE BACKUP............... 49
3
CHOOSING SUITABLE MEDIA
ORIGINALS SUITABLE FOR FAXING ...........50
INITIAL SETTINGS
PART NAMES................................................. 13
● SIZE AND WEIGHT ...................................... 50
● UNSUITABLE ORIGINALS ........................... 51
A LOOK AT THE FAX OPERATION PANEL ..... 14
ABOUT THE LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY.... 16
USING THE ARROW KEYS ........................... 16
ADJUSTING THE BEEP VOLUME ................ 16
ADJUSTING THE RINGING VOLUME........... 17
SETTING THE LENGTH OF ALARM BEEPS .... 18
ADJUSTING THE ALARM BEEP VOLUME .. 19
FAX SETUP .................................................... 20
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
HOW TO ENTER CHARACTERS .................20
ENTERING YOUR NAME AND FAX NUMBER.....21
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME ..................22
SELECTING THE TRANSMISSION MODE ..26
SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE.........27
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS FOR
AUTO RECEPTION .......................................28
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS FOR
MANUAL RECEPTION ..................................29
SELECTING THE RECEPTION PAPER SIZE..29
SETTING THE TRAY SELECTION...................30
SETTING THE DIAL MODE ..........................31
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RECALL TIMES......32
SETTING THE RECALL INTERVAL..............34
SETTING THE INDEX FUNCTION................36
SETTING RESOLUTION PRIORITY .............37
SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR USE WITH
A PC MODEM................................................38
USING THE REMOTE RECEPTION
FUNCTION ....................................................39
DISTINCTIVE RINGING ................................41
STORING NUMBERS FOR AUTOMATIC
DIALING.........................................................42
STORING NUMBERS UNDER GROUP KEYS .....45
1
!AR-FX13_sec.book
4
2 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
5
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
SENDING ORIGINALS ................................... 52
MEMORY .........................................................67
● SETTING THE ORIGINAL .............................52
DATA TRANSFER...........................................68
OPTIONAL TRANSMISSION SETTINGS ...... 54
TRANSMISSION RESERVATION...................70
●
●
●
●
●
●
ORIGINAL SIZE.............................................54
RESOLUTION................................................55
CONTRAST ...................................................55
COVER SHEET .............................................56
MESSAGE FUNCTION..................................57
TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL TRANSMISSION
FUNCTION ....................................................58
DIALING AND TRANSMITTING..................... 59
●
●
●
●
●
DIRECT KEYPAD DIALING...........................59
RAPID KEY DIALING ....................................59
SPEED DIALING ...........................................59
CHAIN DIALING ............................................60
NORMAL DIALING USING THE [SPEAKER]
KEY................................................................60
● USING THE SEARCH KEY ...........................61
● REDIALING....................................................61
IF THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL WHILE
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL............................. 62
CANCELING (DELETING) A STORED FAX JOB...62
RECEIVING FAXES........................................ 63
● USING AUTO MODE.....................................63
● USING MAN. MODE......................................63
● USING A.M. MODE .......................................63
OPTIONAL RECEPTION SETTINGS ............. 64
● TWO-SIDED RECEPTION (AR-208D only)...64
● RECEIVE REDUCE .......................................65
WHEN USING MANUAL SENDING AND
RECEIVING..................................................... 66
BROADCASTING ............................................71
POLLING .........................................................73
● POLLING ...................................................... 73
● SERIAL POLLING......................................... 74
● POLLING TRANSMISSION (MEMORY
POLLING) ..................................................... 75
● RESTRICTING POLLING MACHINES
(POLLING SECURITY) ................................. 77
TIMER OPERATIONS .....................................79
● CANCELING A TIMER TRANSMISSION JOB.. 80
ANTI JUNK FAX ..............................................81
OPERATION IN COPY, PRINTER, SCANNER,
AND FAX MODES ...........................................84
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRINTING OUT REPORTS .............................85
● ACTIVITY REPORT AUTO LISTING ............ 88
● PRINTING TRANSACTION REPORTS........ 89
TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................90
MESSAGES AND SIGNALS ...........................91
● DISPLAY MESSAGES.................................. 91
● AUDIBLE SIGNALS ...................................... 91
7
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................92
INDEX ..............................................................93
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
3 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
The following quick reference guide provides brief explanations the operation of the machine.
Selecting the transmission mode (p.26)
Memory transmission mode
The indicator lights up when
memory transmission mode
is selected.
Direct transmission mode
Press the
[MEMORY] key
to change modes.
The indicator is off when
direct transmission mode
is selected.
Place the original
Using the RSPF (p.52)
Place the original face up
(up to 50 pages at once)
Using the document glass (p.53)
Place the original face
down
3
!AR-FX13_sec.book
4 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Sending a fax
Dialing methods
Direct Dialing
(p.59)
Press the numeric keys to dial.
SPEED/
SEARCH
Speed Dialing
(p.59)
Rapid Key
Dialing (p.59)
01
10
Chain Dialing
(p.60)
SPEED/
SEARCH
Enter a two-digit
Speed Dial number.
09
18
01
10
* It is not necessary to press the [START] key
after pressing a Rapid Key.
09
18
Speed Dial number or Rapid Key set for
Chain Dialing when stored.
REDIAL/
PAUSE
Dial the next part of the number
(a Group Key cannot be used).
Dial with the numeric keys and then
press the [REDIAL/PAUSE] key.
Search Dialing
(p.61)
Enter the first letter of the
stored name.
SPEED/
SEARCH
Press when the first character of the
name is a special character or number.
Search by fax numbers.
Redialing
(p.61)
REDIAL/
PAUSE
Redial the last number dialed.
Sending a fax
Using the RSPF
RESOLUTION
Place the original. (p.52)
CONTRAST
Dial.
Adjust the resolution
and contrast. (p.55)
Using the document glass
Specify the
original size.
(p.54)
Place the original. (p.53)
4
RESOLUTION
CONTRAST
Adjust the resolution
and contrast. (p.55)
Dial.
If you are faxing a
multi-page original,
change pages and
press the [START]
key ( ).
Select the
destination.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
5 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Sending a fax to multiple destinations (Broadcasting) (p.71)
RESOLUTION
BROADCAST
Dial.
CONTRAST
Adjust the resolution
and contrast. (p.55)
Place the original.
Storing a fax job while another job is in progress
Fax transmission
or reception in
progress
RESOLUTION
Place the original.
CONTRAST
Dial.
Adjust the resolution
and contrast. (p.55)
The fax will be
transmitted after
previous jobs are
completed.
Automatically sending a fax at a specified time (timer transmission)
To set up a timer transmission, see "TIMER OPERATIONS" (p.79).
Receiving a fax
Selecting the reception mode (p.63)
"AUTO"
RECEPTION
MODE
"MAN."
Press until the desired
reception mode appears
in the display.
"A.M."
"AUTO" : Faxes are automatically received.
"MAN." : Select this mode when an extension
phone is connected to the machine to
receive phone calls. To receive a fax,
answer the call on the phone and then
press the [START] (
) key.
"A.M." :
Select this mode when an answering
machine is connected to the machine.
Faxes will be received automatically.
Calling a fax machine and requesting automatic transmission of
an original placed in that machine (p.73)
Dial.
Select "POLLING MODE".
* Another fax machine can also call your fax machine and request automatic transmission of a original placed in
your machine. For this to take place, the reception mode of your machine must be set to "AUTO".
5
!AR-FX13_sec.book
6 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
LIST OF FAX FUNCTIONS
The FAX MAIN MENU is used to configure settings for the fax function and program information such as the fax
number of the machine. The settings in the FAX MAIN MENU are shown below.
The procedure for configuring settings is explained in "SELECTING SETTINGS FOR THE FUNCTION" (p.10).
Menu item
Settings (factory default setting appears in bold)
Page
0 : RX DATA TRANSFER
1 : DATA TRANSFER
Enable transfer of received faxes to another fax machine when
printing is not possible.
69
2 : FAX NUMBER
Program the fax number of the machine to which received faxes
will be transferred.
68
1 : SET
Set up a transmission or polling job to take place automatically
at a specified time.
79
2 : CLEAR
Cancel a timer transmission job.
79
1 : TIMER MODE
2 : ENTRY MODE
1 : FAX NUMBER
Store (or delete) fax numbers in Rapid Keys, Speed Dial
numbers, and Group Keys.
1 : RAPID KEY
2 : SPEED #
3 : GROUP KEY
42, 44,
45, 47
2 : DATE&TIME SET
Set the date and time in the machine.
22
3 : OWN PASSCODE SET
Program the name and phone number of the user of the
machine.
21
4 : PASSCODE # MODE
Store fax numbers that are allowed to poll the machine when
polling security is used.
78
5 : DAY LIGHT SAVING
Enable automatic adjustment of the clock at the beginning and
end of daylight savings time.
25
Check and delete stored fax jobs waiting for transmission and
automatic recall jobs.
62
Set the size of an original faxed from the document glass.
1 : 8.5x11
2 : 8.5x14
3 : A4
54
Set the default size of originals faxed from the document glass.
1 : 8.5x11
2 : 8.5x14
3 : A4
54
Set the default resolution for fax transmission.
1 : STANDARD
2 : FINE
3 : SUPER FINE
37
Set the number of rings on which the machine answers calls in
automatic reception mode.
0 - 9 (2)
28
Set the number of rings on which the machine answers calls in
manual reception mode.
0 - 9 (0)
29
3 : MEMORY STATUS
4 : USER PROGRAM
1 : DOC. GLASS SIZE
2 : FIXED DOC. SIZE
3 : RESO. PRIORITY
4 : # OF RINGS (AUTO)
5 : # OF RINGS (MANUAL)
6
!AR-FX13_sec.book
7 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Menu item
6 : AUTO LISTING
Settings (factory default setting appears in bold)
Page
Enable automatic printing of the Activity Report when
information on a total of 50 fax transmissions/receptions
accumulates.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
88
1 : TRANSMISSION
Select the condition for printing reports on fax transmissions.
1 : ALWAYS PRINTS
2 : ERROR ONLY
3 : NEVER PRINTS
89
2 : BROADCAST
Select the condition for printing reports on broadcast
transmissions.
1 : ALWAYS PRINTS
2 : ERROR ONLY
3 : NEVER PRINTS
89
3 : RECEPTION
Select the condition for printing reports on received faxes.
1 : ALWAYS PRINTS
2 : ERROR ONLY
3 : NEVER PRINTS
89
4 : IMAGE MEM. PRINT
Enable printing of the original image on transaction reports.
1 : ALWAYS PRINTS
2 : ERROR ONLY
3 : NEVER PRINTS
89
Set the number of recall attempts that are made when the line is
busy.
00 - 14 (02)
32
Set the number of recall attempts that are made when a
communication error occurs.
0 - 1 (1)
33
Set the interval between recall attempts when the line is busy. 1
to 15 minutes can be selected.
01 - 15 min. (03 min.)
34
Set the interval between recall attempts when a communication
error occurs. 0 to 15 minutes can be selected.
00 - 15 min. (01 min.)
35
Enable the polling security function.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
77
13 : FAX REMOTE
NUMBER
Set the 1-digit number used to activate remote fax reception.
0 - 9 (5)
40
14 : REMOTE RECEPTION
Enable the remote reception function.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
39
Enable automatic fax reception when a fax tone is heard after
answering a call on an extension phone.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
38
7 : PRINT SELECTION
8 : RECALL TIMES BUSY
9 : RECALL TIMES ERR
10 : RECALL INT. BUSY
11 : RECALL INT. ERR
12 : SECURITY SELECT
15 : FAX SIGNAL RCV
7
!AR-FX13_sec.book
8 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Menu item
16 : RCV REDUCE
Page
When a fax is received that is larger that the printing paper,
enable reduction of the fax to the size of the paper to avoid the
fax being cut off.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
65
Set the length of the beep that sounds when fax transmission or
reception ends.
1 : 3 SEC
2 : 1 SEC
3 : NO BEEP
18
Set the volume of the ringer.
1 : OFF
2 : LOW
3 : MIDDLE
4 : HIGH
17
Set the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed.
1 : OFF
2 : LOW
3 : MIDDLE
4 : HIGH
19
Set the dial mode for the type of line you are on.
1 : TONE
2 : PULSE
31
Set the ring pattern for distinctive ring.
1 : OFF
2 : STANDARD
3 : PATTERN 1
4 : PATTERN 2
5 : PATTERN 3
6 : PATTERN 4
7 : PATTERN 5
41
Enable printing of a black mark (index) at the top of each
received fax page.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
36
1 : TIME FORMAT
Select 12-hour or 24-hour format for the time set in the
machine.
1 : 12 HOUR
2 : 24 HOUR
23
2 : DATE FORMAT
Set the format of the date in the display and in printouts.
1 : MMDDYYYY
2 : DDMMYYYY
3 : YYYYMMDD
24
24 : 2-SIDED RX
(AR-208D only)
Print on both sides of the paper when a multi-page fax is received.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
64
25 : TRAY SELECTION
(When the 250-sheet paper
feed unit is installed.)
("24: TRAY SELECTION"
when the AR-208S is
used.)
Set the tray for printing received faxes.
1 : AUTO
2 : TRAY 1
3 : TRAY 2
17 : BEEP LENGTH
18 : RINGER VOLUME
19 : BEEPER VOLUME
20 : DIAL MODE
21 : DISTINCTIVE RING
22 : INDEX PRINT
23 : DATE&TIME FORMAT
8
Settings (factory default setting appears in bold)
30
!AR-FX13_sec.book
9 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Menu item
Settings (factory default setting appears in bold)
Page
5 :ANTI JUNK FAX
1 : ANTI JUNK SELECT
Enable the anti junk function to block fax reception from
specified fax numbers.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
81
Program (or delete) fax numbers from which fax reception is to
be blocked.
1 : SET
2 : CLEAR
82
Activate fax reception when a period of silence longer than the
set time is detected.
00 - 10 (05)
48
Enable fax reception when the answering machine is full and
cannot receive messages or otherwise fails.
1 : ON
2 : OFF
49
1 : 1 TIME
Perform polling transmission once.
75
2 : REPEAT
Perform polling transmission repeatedly.
75
8 : POLLING MODE
Poll another fax machine.
73
9 : SERIAL POLL MODE
Sequentially poll multiple fax machines.
74
2 : JUNK FAX #
6 : A.M. MODE
1: QUIET DETECT TIME
2 : AUTO RECEIVE
7 : MEMORY POLL MODE
9
!AR-FX13_sec.book
10 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SELECTING SETTINGS FOR THE FUNCTION
The general procedure for configuring settings for the fax function is explained below. Follow this procedure to
configure the settings explained on pages 6 through 9.
Note
1
An item can also be selected after pressing the [MENU] key by pressing the numeric key for the item (the key
corresponding to the number that appears in front of the item). When the numeric key is pressed, the item is
selected or entered.
Press the [MODE SELECT] key to
select fax mode.
4
Select a setting or enter information.
To select a setting:
Press the [
] key ( )
or [ ] key ( ) until the
setting is selected.
To enter information:
Press the numeric keys
to enter characters or
numbers.
The "FAX" indicator lights
up to indicate that fax
mode is selected.
2
Press the [MENU] key.
Note
"FAX MAIN MANU" will
appear in the display.
5
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
The setting or information
is entered.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select a menu item and press
the [ENTER] key.
The item is selected.
Repeat this step until the
item that you wish to
configure appears.
• If you mistakenly select the wrong item,
press the [CLEAR] key (
) and repeat
the procedure from step 2.
• To cancel a setting for a fax function,
press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
10
!AR-FX13_sec.book
11 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 1
1
INSTALLATION
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTING THE TELEPHONE LINE CORD
Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the jack on the machine marked
"LINE." Plug the other side into a standard (RJ11C) single-line telephone
wall jack. Be sure not to plug this telephone line cord into the "TEL" jack.
The "TEL" jack is used to attach an extension telephone or answering
machine to the machine. (See "CONNECTING OTHER DEVICES" (p.12))
L
TE
Note
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power
surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for the
power and telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased
from your retailer or at most telephone specialty stores.
E
LIN
ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS
The operation manuals for the machine are as follows:
Facsimile Expansion Kit Operation Manual (this manual)
This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a fax machine.
This manual only explains the fax functions of the machine. For general information on using the machine, including
safety information, installation, paper loading, removal of paper misfeeds, and peripheral equipment, see the
operation manual for the machine.
Operation Manual (for general information)
Explains the machine and how to use it as a copier. Also explains how to install the software that allows the machine
to be used as a printer and scanner for your computer.
The following information is contained in the operation manual for the machine :
OPERATION MANUAL contents
Page
CAUTIONS
3
PART NAMES
9
POWER ON AND OFF
12
LOADING THE PAPER TRAY
15
BYPASS FEED (including special paper)
17
OPERATION MANUAL contents
Page
CHANGING A TRAY'S PAPER SIZE
SETTING
19
MISFEED REMOVAL
70
TONER CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
74
CHECKING THE TOTAL COUNT
77
CLEANING THE MACHINE
78
Online Manual (on the CD-ROM)
This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer and a scanner.
11
!AR-FX13_sec.book
12 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
FINAL PREPARATIONS
CONNECTING OTHER DEVICES
If desired, an answering machine or external telephone can be connected to the machine through the telephone
jack, labeled "TEL," on the rear of the machine.
● Connecting an answering machine to the machine allows you to receive both voice and fax messages when you
are out. To use this feature, first change the outgoing message of your answering machine, and then set the
reception mode of the machine to "A.M." (Answering Machine mode) when you go out.
Note
If you are using distinctive ringing with an answering machine, you do not need to follow the procedure described
below. (Please note that when distinctive ringing is used, the answering machine must be distinctive ring
compatible.)
Comments:
1. It is advisable to keep the length of the message under 10 seconds. If it is too long, you may have difficulty
receiving faxes sent by automatic dialing.
2. Your callers can even leave a voice message and send a fax message on the same call. Modify your outgoing
message to explain that this can be done by pressing their [START] key ( ) after leaving their voice message.
● You can connect an extension phone to the machine to make and receive calls like any other extension phone on
your line. Even if you pick up the extension phone and hear a fax tone, the machine will automatically cut in and
take over the line. Note, however, if you also have a PC modem on the same line, you must turn on the Remote
Reception function, and deactivate the Fax Signal Receive function. See "SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR
USE WITH A PC MODEM" (p.38) and "USING THE REMOTE RECEPTION FUNCTION" (p.39).
Note
12
The Remote Reception function is initially set to "ON".
!AR-FX13_sec.book
13 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 2
2
INITIAL SETTINGS
PART NAMES
RSPF
Original guides
Document
feeder cover
1
Exit area
2
Document feeder tray
3
5
4
Bypass tray
L
TE
TEL jack
LINE jack
E
LIN
6
7
8
9
9
10
1
Document glass
6
Paper output tray
2
Operation panel
7
Paper output tray extension
3
Front cover
8
Power switch
4
Paper tray
9
Handles
5
Bypass tray paper guides
10
Power cord
13
!AR-FX13_sec.book
14 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
A LOOK AT THE FAX OPERATION PANEL
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
13
8
14
9 10
15
16
17
18 19
20
1
Rapid keys
Press one of these keys to dial a fax or telephone
number automatically.
8
[RESOLUTION] key
Press this key to adjust the resolution before
sending faxes.
2
[MEMORY] key / indicator
Used for sending faxes in memory (indicator is lit)
or direct sending (indicator is not lit).
9
[CONTRAST] key
Press this key to adjust the contrast before sending
faxes.
3
[SPEED/SEARCH] key
Press this key to dial a two digit Speed Dial
number.
During character inputting, use this key to delete
an incorrect entry.
Also, press this key twice to search for an
automatic dialing number.
10
[REPORT] key
Press this key to print out a report of a fax
transaction and also when receiving a confidential
fax.
11
Display
Shows various messages during fax operation and
programming.
12
[CLEAR] key (
)
Press this key to stop an operation before it is
completed, or to delete the number that was last
input.
When a setting menu appears, use this key to
move back to the previous menu level.
13
[SHIFT] key / indicator
Press this key to switch between upper and lower
case.
14
[2-SIDED TX] key
Press this key to fax a two-sided original.
4
[BROADCAST] key
Press this key to send originals to a group of
receiving fax machines.
5
[RECEPTION MODE] key
Press this key to select the mode of reception.
6
[REDIAL/PAUSE] key
Press this key to automatically redial the last
number you dialed.
Also, press this key to insert a pause when
entering numbers.
7
[COVERSHEET] key
Press this key to automatically add a cover sheet
and message to a fax.
14
!AR-FX13_sec.book
15 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
11
12
2
21
22
23
24
25
15
[SPEAKER] key
Press this key to begin manual dialing. (To close
the line, press the [SPEAKER] key again.)
16
17
26
27
28
23
LINE STATUS indicator
Lit when sending/receiving faxes, blinking when
receiving data.
[ ] key
Press this key to enter symbols during a name
storing procedure.
Press the " " key to change from pulse dialing to
tone dialing mode.
24
[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators
Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of
the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner,
fax mode indicators).
Numeric keys
Press these keys to dial numbers, and enter
numbers and letters during number/name storing
procedures.
25
[#] key
Press this key to enter symbols during a name
storing procedure. The [#] key scrolls through
symbols in the opposite direction of the [ ] key.
When dialing, press this key after you are finished
scanning originals into memory from the document
glass.
26
[CLEAR ALL] key (
)
This returns all functions to the default settings.
When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the
settings and display to the initial state.
27
[START] key (
)/ indicator
Used for the following:
• To begin sending a fax.
• Reading an original into memory from the
document glass.
• Manually receiving a fax.
• Entering and setting information.
28
Power save indicator
This lights up when the power save function is
activated.
18
RSPF indicator
This lights up when an original is placed in the
RSPF.
19
Error indicator
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed
or other error occurs.
20
Tray location indicator
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator
blinks when the tray is out of paper or is not closed.
21
[MENU] key
Press this key to configure a user program.
22
[
] key (
), [
] key (
), [ENTER] key
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to
select an item in a function setting menu.
Press the [ENTER] key to enter a selection.
15
!AR-FX13_sec.book
16 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
ABOUT THE LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
The machine is equipped with a two-line liquid crystal display (LCD) on the operation panel for displaying various
messages and settings during operation. This LCD can display up to 20 characters on each line. When the machine
is idle, the LCD shows the date, time, reception mode and the stand-by memory available.
Example:
When an original is placed in the RSPF, the second line
changes from "STAND-BY" to "SEND READY".
When the [MENU] key is pressed to configure a setting, the display appears as shown below.
Example:
The selected setting or entered information appears on the
second line.
USING THE ARROW KEYS
To configure settings and program information, press the [MENU] key and then press the [
key (
) to select the item that you wish to configure.
The arrows keys can also be used while entering characters to move the cursor.
] key (
) or [
]
Example:
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to change the
item selection that appears on the second line.
Note
An item can also be selected after pressing the [MENU] key by pressing the numeric key for the item
(the key corresponding to the number that appears in front of the item). When the numeric key is
pressed, the item is selected or entered.
ADJUSTING THE BEEP VOLUME
You can adjust the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed.
The key beep volume is adjusted with "KEY TOUCH SOUND" (Program number 15) in the user programs of copy
mode. See "User Programs" in the Operation Manual (for general information).
16
!AR-FX13_sec.book
17 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
ADJUSTING THE RINGING VOLUME
Adjust the ringing volume of the machine following the procedure below.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "18:RINGER VOLUME" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"18:RINGER VOLUME"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to set the ringer volume.
] key (
)
The selections are as
follows:
1:OFF
2:LOW
3:MIDDLE
4:HIGH
To turn off the ringer,
select "1:OFF".
Note
An extension phone will still ring when the
machine ringer is set to "1:OFF".
17
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
18 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SETTING THE LENGTH OF ALARM BEEPS
You can select the length in seconds of the alarm beeps (emitted at the end of transmission and reception) following
the procedure below.
1
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "17:BEEP LENGTH" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
)
Selection
"17:BEEP LENGTH"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to set the alarm beeps to the desired
length or to turn them off.
The selections are as
follows:
1:3SEC
2:1SEC
3:NO BEEP
5
18
Press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
19 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
ADJUSTING THE ALARM BEEP VOLUME
Adjust the volume of alarm beeps (emitted at the end of transmission and reception) following the procedure below.
1
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
2
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "19:BEEPER VOLUME" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"19:BEEPER VOLUME"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to set the alarm volume.
] key (
)
The selections are as
follows:
1:OFF
2:LOW
3:MIDDLE
4:HIGH
To turn off the alarm,
select "1:OFF".
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
19
!AR-FX13_sec.book
20 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
FAX SETUP
HOW TO ENTER CHARACTERS
You can enter letters with the numeric keys. Letters are marked above each of the numeric keys [2] through [9]. To
enter a letter, press the appropriate key repeatedly until the desired letter appears (the number of the key appears
first, followed by letters in the order marked above the key). The keys used for entering characters are shown below.
The following characters can be entered with the numeric keys:
key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Characters that can be entered
1 Space
A B C 2 a b c
D E F 3 d e f
G H I 4 g h i
J K L 5 j k l
M N O 6 m n o
P Q R S 7 p q r s
T U V 8 t u v
W X Y Z 9 w x y z
* } { ] [ ? > = ; : , + ) ('& % $"!/_-.@ #
0
# @.-_/ !"$ % &'( )+ ,: ; = > ? [ ] { } *
● To enter two characters in succession which require using the same key, press the [
entering the first character, and then enter the second character.
] key (
) once after
● If you enter an incorrect character or number, follow these steps to correct the mistake.
1. Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to move the cursor to the character immediately following the
incorrect character.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key (
).
The character in front of the cursor is deleted.
3. Enter the correct character.
The character is inserted in front of the cursor.
20
!AR-FX13_sec.book
21 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
ENTERING YOUR NAME AND FAX NUMBER
Note
You can view all of the items in the menu display by pressing the [MENU] key, then using the [
] key (
) or
[
] key (
) to scroll through the function list. Pressing the [ENTER] key chooses the displayed function.
Procedures for inputting various items (name, telephone number, date, etc.) are given as follows.
To have your name and fax number printed at the top of every page you transmit, program them by pressing the
operation panel keys as shown below.
● If you enter an incorrect character or number, follow these steps to correct the mistake.
1. Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to move the cursor to the character immediately following the
incorrect character.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key (
).The character in front of the cursor is deleted.
3. Enter the correct character.
IMPORTANT
FCC regulations require that your name, telephone/fax number, and the date and time appear on each fax message
you send. Enter your name and fax number here and set the date and time as explained in the following section to
have the fax machine include this information automatically at the top of your fax messages.
Use the following procedure to enter your name and fax number:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Enter your fax number with the
numeric keys.
Enter your own fax
number (maximum 20
digits) by pressing the
Numeric keys.
To insert a "+", press the
[ ] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [ENTER] key.
"ENTER NAME" will
appear in the display.
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "3:OWN PASSCODE SET" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"3:OWN PASSCODE SET"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:SET" and then press the
[ENTER] key.
7
Enter your name with the numeric
keys.
Enter your name by
pressing the appropriate
Numeric keys as shown
on the left. Press each
key repeatedly until the
desired letter appears in
the display (maximum of
36 characters).
To enter a space, press the [1] key twice.
Selection
"1:SET"
21
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
22 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
8
Press the [ENTER] key.
9
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
The date and time that appear in the display are printed at the top of each page you transmit. Set the date and time
by pressing the keys on the operation panel as shown below.
If you enter an incorrect number, press the [CLEAR] key (
) and re-enter the number.
The time can be displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format. "Month/Day/Year", "Day/Month/Year" or "Year/Month/Day"
can be selected for the order of display of the date.
Use the following procedure to set the date and time:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select "AM" or "PM".
] key (
)
When 24-hour format is
selected, do not perform
this step.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [ENTER] key.
8
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:DATE&TIME SET" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:DATE&TIME SET"
4
Enter the year, month, and day with
the numeric keys and then press the
[ENTER] key.
5
Enter the time with the numeric keys.
22
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
23 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
To change the display format to 12-hour or 24-hour format, follow the steps below:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "23:DATE&TIME FORMAT"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"23:DATE&TIME FORMAT"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:TIME FORMAT" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:TIME FORMAT"
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:12HOUR" or "2:24HOUR".
23
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
24 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
To change the order of display of the date, follow the steps below:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "23:DATE&TIME FORMAT"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"23:DATE&TIME FORMAT"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:DATE FORMAT" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:DATE FORMAT"
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select the display order.
The selections are as
follows:
1:MMDDYYYY
2:DDMMYYYY
3:YYYYMMDD
24
)
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
25 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Enable this setting to have the internal clock automatically move forward and backward at the beginning and end of
Daylight Saving Time.
Note
If a transmission is in progress when the clock adjustment time for daylight savings time arrives, the clock will not
be adjusted until the transmission ends.
Follow these steps to enable Daylight Saving Time.
1
5
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "5:DAY LIGHT SAVING" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"5:DAY LIGHT SAVING"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
25
!AR-FX13_sec.book
26 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SELECTING THE TRANSMISSION MODE
The machine has two modes for sending faxes: memory transmission and direct transmission. To change modes,
press the [MEMORY] key. The MEMORY indicator lights up when memory transmission is selected, and goes off
when direct transmission is selected.
MEMORY indicator
Transmission takes place as follows in each mode:
Memory transmission (the MEMORY indicator is lit)
When a fax is sent from the RSPF and there are no previously stored fax jobs and no job in progress (the telephone
line is not being used), dialing and scanning begin at the same time. Each page is transmitted after it is scanned.
This transmission method is called Quick Online transmission.
If there are previously stored fax jobs or a job in progress, or the fax is being sent from the document glass, the fax
is temporarily scanned into memory before transmission.
Note
When a fax is sent by transmission reservation (p.70), broadcast transmission (p.71), broadcasting using a Group
key (p.72), or timer transmission (p.79), the fax is scanned into memory before transmission.
Direct transmission (the MEMORY indicator is off)
The fax is sent directly after the destination is dialed and the connection established.
The machine memory is not used for direct transmission, and thus direct transmission is possible even when the
memory is full.
Note
26
• A fax job cannot be stored while a direct transmission is in progress.
• Only one page can be sent from the document glass by direct transmission.
• A subsequent function cannot be used while a direct transmission is in progress.
Transmission reservation (p.70), broadcast transmission (p.71), broadcasting using a Group key (p.72), or timer
transmission (p.79)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
27 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE
Your machine has three modes for receiving incoming calls and faxes:
● AUTO mode:
Select this mode when you only want to receive faxes on your telephone line. The machine will automatically
answer all calls and receive incoming faxes.
● MAN. mode:
This is the most convenient mode for receiving phone calls if you have an extension phone. To have true manual
mode, the machine must be set to not answer while in MAN. mode (see "SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS
FOR MANUAL RECEPTION" (p.29)). You can also receive faxes; however, all calls must first be answered by
picking up the receiver on the extension phone.
● A.M. mode:
Select this mode when an answering machine is connected to the machine and you want the answering machine
to answer all calls. This allows you to receive both voice messages and faxes while you are out.
Note
If you are using distinctive ringing as described in "DISTINCTIVE RINGING" on page 41, you must set the
reception mode to AUTO. This is true, as well, if you are using an answering machine with distinctive ringing (in
this case, the answering machine must be connected to a separate wall jack, not to your machine).
To select the reception mode, press the [RECEPTION MODE] key until the desired reception mode appears in the
display.
NOV 05 WED 8:20 AM
STAD-BY
AUTO 100%
The selected reception
mode appears.
For more information on reception modes, refer to "RECEIVING FAXES" (p.63)".
27
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
28 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS FOR AUTO RECEPTION
You can set the number of rings before the machine answers in AUTO mode following the procedure below.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:# OF RINGS (AUTO)" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:# OF RINGS (AUTO)"
4
Press a numeric key to select the
number of rings.
Select the number of
rings you would like to
use (0 to 9).
5
28
Press the [ENTER] key.
Note
If an external telephone is connected, the
external telephone will ring one time when
auto reception is set to 0 rings.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
29 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS FOR MANUAL RECEPTION
The number of rings before the machine answers in MANUAL mode can also be set.
If you do not want the machine to answer at all in MANUAL Mode, select "0" in Step 4 below.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
4
Press a numeric key to select the
number of rings.
Select the number of
rings you would like to
use (0 to 9).
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "5:# OF RINGS (MANUAL)"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"5:# OF RINGS (MANUAL)"
SELECTING THE RECEPTION PAPER SIZE
Set the size of paper to be used to print received faxes. A size setting other than "A4", "8.5x11", or "8.5x14" is
regarded as out of paper. To set the paper size, see "LOADING PAPER" in the Operation Manual (for general
information).
29
!AR-FX13_sec.book
30 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE TRAY SELECTION
(when the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed)
Follow the steps below to select the paper tray for received faxes.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "25:TRAY SELECTION" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"25:TRAY SELECTION"
Note
4
Select "24: TRAY SELECTION" when the
AR-208S is used.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select the tray selection.
The selections are as
follows:
1:AUTO
2:TRAY 1
3:TRAY 2
30
)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
31 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE DIAL MODE
The machine can be used with both touch-tone and pulse telephone lines. Touch-tone uses tones of different
pitches for each numeric key, while pulse lines use a series of pulses. Your machine must be set to match the kind
of telephone line you are using: touch-tone or pulse.
1
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "20:DIAL MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"20:DIAL MODE"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select the dial mode.
] key (
)
The selections are as
follows:
1:TONE
2:PULSE
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
31
!AR-FX13_sec.book
32 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE NUMBER OF RECALL TIMES
The machine will automatically reattempt transmission when a transmission is not successful because the line is
busy or a communication error occurs. This setting is used to select the number of recall attempts that will be made.
Note
• If a transmission is still not successful after the set number of recall attempts is made, a report will
print and the document will be cleared from memory.
• If a communication error occurs because the memory becomes full during transmission, no recall
attempts will be made.
• Recall attempts for a direct transmission will only be made when the RSPF is used. Recall attempts
will not be made when the document glass is used.
• When the machine is waiting to make a recall attempt for a direct transmission, other operations
such as storing a transmission or selecting a function cannot be performed.
When the line is busy
You can select the number of recall attempts made when the line is busy.
If "00" is entered, the machine will not make any recall attempts.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "8:RECALL TIMES BUSY"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"8:RECALL TIMES BUSY"
4
Press the numeric keys to select the
number of recall attempts.
Enter the number of
recall times ("00" to "14").
32
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
33 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
When a communication error occurs
You can select the number of recall attempts made when a communication error occurs.
If "0" is entered, the machine will not make any recall attempts.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
2
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "9:RECALL TIMES ERR"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"9:RECALL TIMES ERR"
4
Press the numeric keys to select the
number of recall attempts.
Enter the number of
recall times ("0" or "1").
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
33
!AR-FX13_sec.book
34 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE RECALL INTERVAL
The machine will automatically reattempt transmission when a transmission is not successful because the line is
busy or a communication error occurs. This setting is used to select the interval between recall attempts.
Note
• If a transmission is still not successful after the set number of recall attempts is made, a report will
print and the document will be cleared from memory.
• If a communication error occurs because the memory becomes full during transmission, no recall
attempts will be made.
• Recall attempts for a direct transmission will only be made when the RSPF is used. Recall attempts
will not be made when the document glass is used.
• When the machine is waiting to make a recall attempt for a direct transmission, other operations
such as storing a transmission or selecting a function cannot be performed.
When the line is busy
You can select the interval between recall attempts when the line is busy. An interval from 1 to 15 minutes can be
selected.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "10:RECALL INT. BUSY"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"10:RECALL INT. BUSY"
4
Press the numeric keys to select the
recall interval.
Enter the recall interval
("01" to "15").
34
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
35 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
When a communication error occurs
You can select the interval between recall attempts when a communication error occurs. An interval from 0 to 15
minutes can be selected. If the recall interval is set to 0 minutes, the machine will immediately call again after
breaking the connection due to the communication error.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "11:RECALL INT. ERR" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"11:RECALL INT. ERR"
4
Press the numeric keys to select the
recall interval.
Enter the recall interval
("00" to "15").
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
35
!AR-FX13_sec.book
36 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING THE INDEX FUNCTION
You can print an index mark along the edge of the pages in each job. This makes it easy to separate different jobs
on the output tray.
Separate faxes
with index marks.
Use the following procedure to set the index function:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "22:INDEX PRINT" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"22:INDEX PRINT"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
36
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
37 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING RESOLUTION PRIORITY
For most faxing jobs, you will most likely want to specify the resolution. However, you can also set a default
resolution when no setting is made using the [RESOLUTION] key.
To turn on this function, follow the procedure below:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "3:RESO. PRIORITY" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"3:RESO. PRIORITY"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the transmission resolution.
The selections are as
follows:
1:STANDARD
2:FINE
3:SUPER FINE
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
37
!AR-FX13_sec.book
38 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR USE WITH A PC
MODEM
The machine is set to automatically begin reception if you pick up from an extension telephone and the machine
detects a fax tone. However, if you are using a modem on the same line, you must deactivate this function:
otherwise the machine will mistakenly attempt to receive the transmission from your computer. To turn off the Fax
Signal Receive function, follow the procedure below.
Note
If you turn off the Fax Signal Receive function, be sure to activate the Remote Reception function. See "USING
THE REMOTE RECEPTION FUNCTION" on page 39 for details on how to do this.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "15:FAX SIGNAL RCV" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"15:FAX SIGNAL RCV"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
38
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
39 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
USING THE REMOTE RECEPTION FUNCTION
The machines Remote Reception feature is designed to allow you to activate fax reception from an extension
telephone. The Remote Reception function operates even when the FAX Signal Receive function is turned off. See
"SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR USE WITH A PC MODEM" on page 38. When you hear the fax tone, simply
press the one-digit Fax Remote Number (Factory setting: 5) and
. Follow the procedure below to use this
feature.
Note
If you are not using a PC modem on the same line as your machine, and have not turned off the Fax Signal
Receive function, you do not need to make any changes to the Remote Reception function. Simply use the
factory settings. The machine will automatically take over the line should you answer from the extension phone
and a fax tone is detected.
Turning on Remote Reception:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
)
2
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "14:REMOTE RECEPTION"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"14:REMOTE RECEPTION"
39
!AR-FX13_sec.book
40 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
Setting a Fax Remote Number:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "13:FAX REMOTE NUMBER"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"13:FAX REMOTE NUMBER"
4
Press a numeric key to enter the Fax
Remote Number.
Enter the number you
would like to use as the
Fax Remote Number ("0"
to "9").
5
40
Press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
41 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Distinctive ringing is a service offered by some telephone companies that allows you to use up to six different
telephone numbers, each with a distinctive ringing pattern, on your regular single line. If you subscribe to a
distinctive ringing service, you can set your fax to automatically answer when it detects one of these ringing patterns,
and use the number corresponding to that pattern as an exclusive fax number.
Important:
● To use distinctive ringing, you must subscribe to your phone company’s distinctive ringing service. Do not use this
setting if you do not subscribe to a distinctive ringing service.
When using this feature, you must set the reception mode of your machine to AUTO (See "SELECTING THE
RECEPTION MODE" (p.27)). When your designated fax number is dialed, the machine will automatically answer
and begin reception. Note that other devices you have connected on the same line will also ring until the machine
answers. If one of your other numbers is dialed, the machine will neither ring nor answer.
2
To use distinctive ringing, select the ringing pattern to which you want your machine to answer, as shown below.
The selections for ringing are:
1. OFF:
Answers all ringing patterns (This turns distinctive ringing off.)
2. STANDARD: Your machine normal ringing pattern
3. PATTERN 1: Two short rings
4. PATTERN 2: One short, one long, and one short ring
5. PATTERN 3: Three short rings
6. PATTERN 4: Three rings
7. PATTERN 5: Two rings
Use the following procedure to change the ringing pattern.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select a ringing pattern.
] key (
)
Select a ringing pattern by scrolling through them
with the arrow keys in the order of the above list.
2
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "21:DISTINCTIVE RING" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"21:DISTINCTIVE RING"
41
!AR-FX13_sec.book
42 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
STORING NUMBERS FOR AUTOMATIC DIALING
Automatic Dialing is a quick and convenient way to dial by using only a Rapid key (Rapid Key Dialing), or pressing
the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and select the SPEED and entering a two digit number (Speed Dialing).
To use Automatic Dialing, you must first store the full number. The way you store it depends on whether you want to
use it for Rapid Key Dialing or Speed Dialing:
Storing numbers
Use the following procedure to store numbers for Rapid Key Dialing or Speed Dialing:
1
2
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
6
To program a Rapid Key,
press a Rapid key ("01"
to "18").
To program a Speed Dial
number, press two
numeric keys ("00" to
"99") and then press the
[ENTER] key.
7
Selection
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:FAX NUMBER" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
8
"1:FAX NUMBER"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the type of auto-dial number
that you wish to program and then
press the [ENTER] key.
To program a Rapid Key,
select "1:RAPID KEY".
To program a Speed Dial
number, select
"2:SPEED #".
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:SET" and then press the
[ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:SET"
42
Enter the fax number with the numeric
keys.
Enter the fax number
(maximum of 40 digits
including pauses) using
the numeric keys.
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the Rapid Key or enter the
Speed Dial number that you wish to
program.
Press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
43 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
9
Enter the name of the destination with
the numeric keys.
Enter the name of the
location or party by
pressing numeric keys as
described in "HOW TO
ENTER CHARACTERS"
on page 20 (maximum of
20 characters). If you do
not want to enter a name,
skip this step.
10
14
Press the [ENTER] key.
15
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select the international
communication mode.
Press the [ENTER] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select a Chain Dial setting.
)
16
12
Press the [ENTER] key.
13
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the communication speed.
The selections are as
follows:
1:33600bps
2:14400bps
3:9600bps
4:4800bps
Note
For international dialing, if you find that line
noise necessitates a slower transmission
speed, set the appropriate transmission
speed. If you are not sure if a slower speed
is required, set the speed normally.
Sometimes when faxing internationally, line
noise can cause the transmission to stop
momentarily. To reduce these delays,
choose the appropriate international
transmission mode.
Press the [ENTER] key.
Return to Step 5 to store
another number.
If you wish to set the
number as a Chain Dial
number, select "1:SET".
Otherwise, select
"2:CANCEL".
(See "CHAIN DIALING"
(p.60))
If the number is not set as a chain dial number,
the communication speed and international
communication mode cannot be selected. Press
the [ENTER] key and go to step 17.
)
The selections are as
follows:
1:NO
2:MODE 1
3:MODE 2
4:MODE 3
Note
11
] key (
17
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
If the number is a Rapid
key number, you can
write the name on the
label above the
appropriate Rapid key.
Note
You may need to add a pause between
certain digits in the number to allow time for
connection. For example, if you are on a
PBX telephone system that requires an
access number, such as "9", to be dialed to
access an outside line, you will need to
enter a pause between the access number
and the fax number of the other party.
Pauses are entered by pressing the
[REDIAL/PAUSE] key (2 seconds per
pause). If necessary, several pauses can be
entered in a row.
43
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
44 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
Use the following procedure to clear numbers:
1
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Enter the Rapid Key or Speed Dial
number that you wish to delete.
To delete a Rapid Key,
press the appropriate
Rapid key.
To delete a Speed Dial
number, enter the 2-digit
number with the numeric
keys and then press the
[ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [ENTER] key.
Return to Step 5 to clear
another number.
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:FAX NUMBER" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
8
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
Press the [MENU] key a
number of times until you
exit.
"1:FAX NUMBER"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the type of auto-dial number
that you wish to delete.
To delete a Rapid Key,
select "1:RAPID KEY".
To delete a Speed Dial
number, select
"2:SPEED #".
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "2:CLEAR" appears, and then
press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:CLEAR"
44
Note
)
• A Rapid Key or Speed Dial number cannot
be deleted if it has been stored in a Group
Key.
• A Rapid Key or Speed Dial number cannot
be deleted if it is being used for a
transmission that has been stored or is in
progress.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
45 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
STORING NUMBERS UNDER GROUP KEYS
Group keys allow you to dial a group of fax numbers by simply pressing the appropriate Group key once. They are
convenient for the Broadcasting function, which is used to transmit an original to a group of fax machines.
All Rapid keys can be programmed as Group keys. To program or clear a group key, follow the steps below. Note
that one key cannot be programmed as both a Rapid key and a Group key at the same time.
● Up to 100 fax numbers can be stored in one Group key.
● Rapid Keys, Speed Dial numbers, and numbers directly entered with the numeric keys can be stored in Group
Keys.
Storing/adding numbers in a Group Key:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
6
Press the Rapid key you wish to use
as a Group key .
To add numbers:
After pressing the Group
Key, press the [ ] key
( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select "1:YES" and then
press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Enter the fax numbers using any of the following
methods:
• Press a Rapid Key and then press the [ENTER]
key.
• Enter a Speed Dial number with the numeric
keys and then press the [ENTER] key.
• Enter a number with the numeric keys and then
press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:FAX NUMBER" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Note
Selection
"1:FAX NUMBER"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "3:GROUP KEY" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Enter the numbers that you wish to
store in the Group Key.
8
• One Group Key cannot be stored in
another Group Key.
• A message will appear if you select a
Rapid Key or Speed Dial number that is
already stored in another Group Key.
Press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"3:GROUP KEY"
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:SET" and then press the
[ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:SET"
45
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
46 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
9
Enter a name for the Group Key with
the numeric keys.
Enter the name of the
group by pressing
numeric keys as
described in "HOW TO
ENTER CHARACTERS"
on page 20 (maximum of
20 characters). If you do
not want to enter a name,
skip this step.
To add numbers:
The entered name appears. Edit the name if you need
to make a change.
10
Press the [ENTER] key.
Return to Step 7 to
program another Group
key.
11
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
46
!AR-FX13_sec.book
47 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
Deleting numbers from Group Keys:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
7
Enter the numbers that you wish to
delete.
Enter the fax numbers using any of the following
methods:
• Press a Rapid Key.
• Enter a Speed Dial number with the numeric
keys.
• Enter a number with the numeric keys.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
8
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Selection
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:FAX NUMBER" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:FAX NUMBER"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "3:GROUP KEY" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
9
To exit, press the [ ] key (
key ( ) to select "2:END".
) or [
]
Selection
"2:END"
To program another Group Key, select
"1:CONTINUE", press the [ENTER] key, and return to
step 7.
10
Press the [ENTER] key.
11
Press the [MENU] key.
"3:GROUP KEY"
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "2:CLEAR" and then press
the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:CLEAR"
To delete a Group, press the appropriate Group key.
6
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:FAX #" and then press the
[ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:FAX #"
To delete all numbers from the Group Key:
Select "2:GROUP" and press the [ENTER] key.
47
!AR-FX13_sec.book
48 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
USING THE MACHINE WITH AN
ANSWERING MACHINE
QUIET DETECT TIME
Quiet Detect Time is the function that enables the machine to be used along with an answering machine for both
phone messages and faxes. After the answering machine has answered, any duration of silence longer than a
certain threshold time will prompt the machine to take over the line and prepare to receive a fax. The Quiet Detect
Time can be set from 00 to 10 seconds, following the procedure below.
1
4
Press the [MENU] key.
Enter the Quiet Detect Time with the
numeric keys.
Enter the Quiet Detect
Time in seconds, from 00
to 10. (setting "00" turns
off Quiet Detect Time)
2
)
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:QUIET DETECT TIME" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "6:A.M. MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"6:A.M. MODE"
s
3
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"1:QUIET DETECT TIME"
Note
48
• The machine has been set at the factory for a Quiet Detect Time of 5 seconds, which gives the best
performance for most answering machines. However, you may have to adjust the Quiet Detect Time depending
on your answering machine’s disconnect time, the time before the machine disconnects the line after a period
of silence. If your machine has a short disconnect time, you may have to shorten the Quiet Detect Time.
However, if the machine is interrupting callers in the middle of messages, you should set a longer Quiet Detect
Time.
• If there is a pause at the end of your answering machine message, make sure that the Quiet Detect Time is
longer than this pause.
• Setting Quiet Detect Time to 00 turns the function off. However, the machine will not be able to receive faxes
sent using manual dialing (picking up the receiver, dialing the number, and pressing the [START] key ( )
when the fax tone is heard).
• If your answering machine is set to answer calls after more rings than the machine's number of rings setting,
the machine will always answer first and thereby prevent callers from leaving messages in the answering
machine.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
49 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INITIAL SETTINGS
If Quiet Detect Time is not working properly...
With some answering machines, there is simply no Quiet Detect Time that will allow both reception of faxes and
uninterrupted voice messages. Even in this case, however, you can set up the machine to receive both phone and
fax messages from callers on touch-tone lines. Follow this procedure:
1. Set the Quiet Detect Time to 00.
2. Alter your phone message to tell callers that they can send a fax by pressing the Remote Reception Number
(factory set to 5), followed by the " " key twice.
ANSWERING MACHINE BACKUP
There may be times when the tape on your answering machine becomes full, or
when the answering machine itself malfunctions. It is still possible to receive faxes even under these conditions, by
turning on the Auto Receive function. The machine will automatically answer all calls after five rings. To use this
function, follow the procedure below.
1
4
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
2
)
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:AUTO RECEIVE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "6:A.M. MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"6:A.M. MODE"
3
Selection
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
"2:AUTO RECEIVE"
Note
If you are using Auto Receive, make sure that your answering machine is set to answer on four rings or less.
Otherwise, the machine will take over all calls, preventing callers from leaving voice messages.
49
2
!AR-FX13_sec.book
50 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 3
3
CHOOSING SUITABLE MEDIA
ORIGINALS SUITABLE FOR FAXING
Make sure that the originals you want to fax meet specifications and guidelines listed in this section.
SIZE AND WEIGHT
The size and weight of originals that you can load in the RSPF depend on whether you load one sheet at a time or
several sheets at once.
When using the RSPF
14 lbs.
(56 /m2)
24 lbs.
(90.3 /m2)
One-sided original : 19.7" (500 mm)
Two-sided original : 14" (356 mm)
5-1/2"
(140 mm)
8-1/2"
(216 mm)
8-1/2"
(216 mm)
Note
When feeding in a long original, grasp the original at the edges to guide it into the machine.
When using the document glass
14"
(356 mm)
Maximum
8-1/2"
(216 mm)
Note
When you are using the faxing functions of the machine, your originals are, in effect, being scanned through the
machine. The area of a original that is scanned by the machine while faxing is slightly smaller than the actual
original size. Any text or graphics outside this area will not be scanned.
0.04" ~ 0.16"
(1 mm ~ 4 mm)
Scanning length
and width
0.16" or less
(4 mm or less)
50
Max. 0.17" (4.5 mm)
(along the other edges in totals)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
51 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
CHOOSING SUITABLE MEDIA
UNSUITABLE ORIGINALS
General guidelines:
● All clips, staples, and pins should be removed from originals before they are used. If these are not removed, they
may damage the machine.
● Ink, glue, and correction fluid on originals must be completely dry before using the originals with the machine.
● Originals that are in some way dangerous to the internal mechanisms of the machine should not be used.
● When faxing, any writing on the originals that is yellow, yellowish-green, or light blue cannot be transmitted.
The following kinds of originals should not be used:
● Originals with a glossy coating
● Originals with static electricity
● Originals with tears, folds, or curls
3
● Originals that have become stuck together and cannot be easily separated
● Originals with holes, windows, or perforations
● Transparency films, tracing paper, or other transparencies
● Originals with plastic or metallic coatings
Note
• SHARP does not accept any responsibility for the loss or damage of originals.
• Scanning an original that is longer than 500 mm will result in a misfeed.
51
!AR-FX13_sec.book
4
52 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 4
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
The machine offers a range of sophisticated features that allow you to control image quality, reception mode,
broadcasting, polling, and transmission priorities. Functions such as sending original(s) from memory and
substituting reception into memory are possible, due to the large memory capacity.
SENDING ORIGINALS
SETTING THE ORIGINAL
This section describes setting original(s) in the RSPF or on the document glass.
When Using the RSPF:
1
Confirm that there are no original(s)
on the document glass and that
copying is not in progress, then
gently close the RSPF.
2
Adjust the original guides to the width
of your original(s).
3
Place the original(s) face up and push
it gently into the document feeder
tray. The top edge of the original(s)
should enter the fax first.
Original face up
52
4
There are two ways to send the fax:
• To scan the original into memory, then dial and
transmit, continue with the "DIALING AND
TRANSMITTING" section. (p.59)
• To dial and transmit the original directly without
first scanning it into memory, press the
[MEMORY] key to make the [MEMORY] key
indicator go off. Continue with the "DIALING
AND TRANSMITTING" section. (p.59)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
53 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
When placing the Original on the document glass:
1
2
Confirm that there are no original(s) in
the RSPF, and open the RSPF.
5
Press the [START] key (
The set original size
appears in the display
and then scanning
begins.
Place the original face down on the
document glass. Align the original
according to the original scale in the
illustration below. (Line up the center
of the edge of the original with the
(
) mark.)
Note
Original
scale
After the [START] key (
) is pressed, the
set original size appears in the display.
(EX. )
READING
8.5x11
Gently close the RSPF.
6
Note
4
When using the document glass, do not set
original(s) in the RSPF.
If needed, set the original size (p.54),
resolution (p.55), and contrast (p.55).
Continue with the "DIALING AND
TRANSMITTING" (p.59) section.
#001
100%
Make sure that the displayed size is the
same as the actual original size. (The
factory default setting for the original size is
"8.5x11".) If the displayed size is not correct,
press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
) to stop
operation and then change the original size
setting. (See "ORIGINAL SIZE" (p.54))
When faxing from the document glass, if the
size of the original is different from the
specified size, part of the image may be cut
off.
mark
3
).
If you have more than one original to
read into memory, place the next
page, and press the [START] key ( )
to read each page.
Go to step 7 after the last page has been
scanned.
7
Press the [#] key.
Transmission begins.
53
4
!AR-FX13_sec.book
54 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
OPTIONAL TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS
There are several transmission settings that you can make before dialing and transmitting an original.
ORIGINAL SIZE
The original size can be set to "8.5x11", "8.5x14", or "A4". The setting is only effective for one transmission.
If desired, you can set a fixed original size that remains in effect for all transmissions.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:DOC. GLASS SIZE" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:DOC. GLASS SIZE"
To set a fixed original size for all transmissions:
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select
"2:FIXED DOC. SIZE".
Note
4
To temporarily change the original size
setting when faxing from the document
glass, use the "1: DOC. GLASS SIZE"
setting. To change the permanent original
size setting, use the "2: FIXED DOC. SIZE"
setting.
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select the original size.
] key (
The selections are as
follows:
1:8.5x11
2:8.5x14
3:A4
54
)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
55 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
RESOLUTION
To do this, press the [RESOLUTION] key one or more times until the desired resolution settings appear in the
display, and then press the [ENTER] key.
Your fax has five resolution settings:
• STANDARD
Use STANDARD for ordinary originals. This setting gives you the fastest transmission.
• FINE
Use FINE for improved reproduction, especially with originals containing small letters or fine drawings.
• SUPER FINE
Use SUPER FINE when you need the highest quality of reproduction.
• FINE (HALF TONE)
Use FINE (HALF TONE) if your original is a photograph or has gradations of color (such as a color original). This
setting will produce a clearer image than Fine used alone.
• S. FINE (HALF TONE)
Use S.FINE (HALF TONE) if your original is a photograph or has gradations of color (such as a color original). This
setting will produce a clearer image than Super fine used alone.
In order to transmit with FINE or SUPER FINE resolution, the receiving fax machine must also have that resolution.
If it doesn't, the next best available setting will be used.
If you do not change the setting, the resolution set using the RESOLUTION PRIORITY (p.37) setting will be
automatically selected.
4
CONTRAST
The fax automatically controls the contrast, but you can also control it manually. To do this, press the [CONTRAST]
key one or more times until the desired contrast settings appear in the display, and then press the [ENTER] key. The
three contrast levels are MEDIUM, DARK, and LIGHT.
55
!AR-FX13_sec.book
56 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
COVER SHEET
You can have your fax generate a cover sheet and send it as the last page of the transmission. The cover sheet
includes the date and time, the sender's name and number, and the receiver's name and number if an automatic
dialing number is used. The total number of pages sent is indicated on the bottom.
One of five messages can also be added to the cover sheet.
Your (transmitting)
machine
Automatically prints
cover page
Select cover sheet
and message
functions
AUTOMATIC COVER SHEET
If the message function
is selected, a message
is printed. (p.57)
IMPORTANT
Transmission
DATE
: MAY-11-200X FRI 07:30 PM
T
: SERVICE CENTER
O
FAX # : 0333829161
FROM : SHARP
Beep
FAX # : 0666211221
PAGES : 02PAGES WERE SENT
(INCLUDING THIS PAGE)
Receiving machine
Note
If the cover sheet function is not
selected, the message is printed at
the top of the first page received.
Reception
• The receiver's name must be programmed in either the Rapid Key or Speed Dial function for it to appear on the
Cover Sheet.
• The cover sheet function must be selected each time you wish to add a cover sheet to a fax transmission.
• To add a message to a cover sheet, the message must be selected using the message function.
To include a cover sheet with a transmission, follow these steps:
1
Press the [COVER SHEET] key until
"1:COVER SHEET SET" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:COVER SHEET SET"
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
56
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
57 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
MESSAGE FUNCTION
One of the following messages can be selected: "CONFIDENTIAL", "PLS. DISTRIBUTE", "URGENT", "PLS. CALL
BACK", "IMPORTANT".
Note
If a message is selected when the cover sheet function is not used, the message will be added to the top of the
first page of the fax.
To add a message to a cover sheet, follow these steps:
1
Press the [COVER SHEET] key.
2
Press the [COVER SHEET] key until
"2:TX MESSAGE SET" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
4
Selection
"2:TX MESSAGE SET"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [
to select a message.
] key (
)
The selections are as
follows:
1:NO MASSAGE
2:CONFIDENTIAL
3:PLS. DISTRIBUTE
4:URGENT
5:PLS. CALL BACK
6:IMPORTANT
If you do not wish to add
a message, select "1:NO
MESSAGE".
4
Press the [ENTER] key.
57
!AR-FX13_sec.book
58 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL TRANSMISSION FUNCTION
The RSPF can be used to automatically fax a two-sided original. If desired, the back of the original can be rotated
180° before transmission.
Note
• The original must be placed in the RSPF when using the two-sided original transmission function. The
document glass cannot be used.
• The two-sided original transmission function cannot be selected when direct transmission mode is selected.
Likewise, direct transmission mode cannot be selected when the two-sided original transmission function is
selected.
Follow these steps to fax a two-sided original:
1
Original face up
2
For the size and weight of
two-sided originals that
can be scanned using the
RSPF, see page 50.
Press the [2-SIDED TX] key until the
appropriate setting appears.
The selections are as
follows:
OFF
ON (ROTATE)
ON (NON-ROTATE)
Select the setting according to the original type
(booklet or tablet) as indicated below. If the setting is
incorrect, every other page of the received fax will be
inverted.
Booklet
If you are faxing a
two-sided booklet type
original, select "ON
(ROTATE)".
58
Tablet
Place the original(s) in the RSPF.
(p.52)
If you are faxing a
two-sided tablet type
original, select "ON
(NON-ROTATE)".
To cancel this function, select "OFF".
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
59 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
DIALING AND TRANSMITTING
Once you have set the original (either in the RSPF or on the document glass), and have selected the desired
transmission settings, you are ready to dial the number of the receiving fax machine and transmit the original. You
can choose from one of the several ways of dialing that best suit your needs.
DIRECT KEYPAD DIALING
If the number of the fax you want to reach is not a Rapid key or Speed Dial number, use Direct Keypad Dialing to
manually enter it using the following procedure:
1
2
Confirm that you have correctly set
the original in the RSPF or on the
document glass. (See "SETTING THE
ORIGINAL" (p.52))
3
Check the display. If the number of the
receiving machine is shown correctly,
press the [START] key ( ).
While "SENDING" is
shown in the display, do
not open the RSPF.
Enter the number of the fax machine
you want to send to by pressing the
numeric keys.
If it is not correct, press
the [CLEAR] key (
) to
backspace and clear one
digit at a time, and then
enter the correct number.
4
RAPID KEY DIALING
If the number you want to dial has been stored as a Rapid key number (See
"STORING NUMBERS FOR AUTOMATIC DIALING" (p.42)), you can dial it by
pressing the appropriate Rapid key as shown:
SPEED DIALING
If the number you want to dial has been stored as a Speed Dial number, you can dial it using the following
procedure:
1
Press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and
then enter the two-digit number by
pressing the numeric keys (See
"STORING NUMBERS FOR
AUTOMATIC DIALING" (p.42)).
If it is not correct, press
the [CLEAR] key (
) to
backspace and clear two
digit at a time, and then
enter the correct number.
2
Press the [START] key ( ) and check
the name or number that appears in
the display.
While "READING" is
shown in the display, do
not open the RSPF.
59
!AR-FX13_sec.book
60 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
CHAIN DIALING
The Chain Dialing function allows you to combine a Rapid Key or Speed Dial number (See "STORING NUMBERS
FOR AUTOMATIC DIALING" (p.42)) set for Chain Dialing with another Rapid Key, Speed Dial number, or number
dialed with the numeric keys to dial one fax number up to 50 digits long. The following are some examples of how
this can be done:
• Press Rapid Keys set for Chain Dialing in the correct order for the fax number that you wish to dial. For example,
press Rapid Key 01 followed by Rapid Key 02. The final Rapid Key pressed for the fax number must not be set for
Chain Dialing. Transmission will begin automatically when the final Rapid Key is pressed.
• Enter Speed Dial numbers set for Chain Dialing in the correct order for the fax number that you wish to dial. For
example, press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and [2] [2], followed by the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and [2] [7]. The final
Speed Dial number entered for the fax number must not be set for Chain Dialing. Transmission will begin when the
[START] key (
) is pressed after the final Speed Dial number is entered.
• Enter the fax number that you wish to dial with the numeric keys. Press the [REDIAL/PAUSE] key to enter a pause
and then enter the next number. Transmission will begin when the [START] key (
) is pressed after the final
number is entered.
Note
• To use a Rapid Key or Speed Dial number for Chain Dialing, the Rapid Key or Speed Dial number must be set
for Chain Dialing when it is stored (See "STORING NUMBERS FOR AUTOMATIC DIALING" (p.42)).
• When using Chain Dialing, the international communication setting of the final number entered is effective.
International communication mode cannot be used if the final number is entered using a Rapid Key or Speed
Dial number that does not have the setting enabled, or if the final number is entered with the numeric keys.
NORMAL DIALING USING THE [SPEAKER] KEY
When dialing normally with the [SPEAKER] key, press the [SPEAKER] key and dial using the numeric keys. You can
hear the line and fax tones from the other machine through the speaker, allowing you to confirm the response of the
other machine.
1
Dialing with a Speed Dial
number and then press
the [ENTER] key or
[START] key (
).
Set the original in the RSPF and press
the [SPEAKER] key. (See "SETTING
THE ORIGINAL" (p.52))
To adjust the volume,
press the left and [ ]
key ( ) or [ ] key
( ).
2
3
When you hear the fax reception tone
of the other machine, press the
[START] key ( ).
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:SEND", and then press
the [ENTER] key or [START] key ( ).
Dial the fax number of the receiving
machine.
Dialing with the numeric
keys.
Dialing with a Rapid Key.
60
!AR-FX13_sec.book
61 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
USING THE SEARCH KEY
If you do not remember the Rapid key or Speed Dial number in which you have stored a particular fax number, you
can search for the number by following the steps below:
1
Press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key
twice.
2
Enter the first letter of the stored
name by pressing the appropriate
numeric key (the key below the
marked letter) until the letter appears
in the display.
If the name begins with a special
character or number, press [1] key.
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to scroll through the names. Stop
when the desired name appears in the
display.
5
Press the [START] key ( ).
The original will be automatically
transmitted once the connection is
made.
If you do not remember
the first letter, go to Step
3 and scroll through the
list from the beginning.
3
4
Press the [ENTER] key.
REDIALING
You can send a fax to the number you last dialed, you can redialing it using the following procedure:
1
Press the [REDIAL/PAUSE] key.
2
Press the [START] key (
).
61
!AR-FX13_sec.book
62 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
IF THE MEMORY BECOMES FULL
WHILE SCANNING AN ORIGINAL
If the memory becomes full while scanning an original, "MEMORY FULL ERROR" will appear in the display and
scanning will stop.
If the memory becomes full while the first page is being scanned, scanning will stop and the transmission will be
canceled.
If the memory becomes full while scanning a page after the first page, scanning will stop. You can transmit the
pages that have already been scanned, or cancel the transmission and clear the pages from memory.
Follow the steps below to transmit or clear the pages that have already been scanned.
1. The memory becomes full and scanning stops. "MEMORY FULL ERROR" appears in the display.
2. To clear the pages that have already been scanned and cancel transmission, press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select "2:CANCEL". To transmit the pages that have already been scanned, select "1:SEND XX?".
3. Press the [ENTER] key
The pages are cleared from memory. If you selected "1:SEND XX?" in step 2, the pages are automatically
transmitted.
Note
If you are using Quick On-line transmission (p.26), the pages that were scanned are automatically transmitted.
CANCELING (DELETING) A
STORED FAX JOB
This procedure is used to check and cancel a fax job that is waiting for transmission, such as an automatic recalling
job, a stored fax job, a remote transmission job, or a timer transmission job.
Note
A stored fax job cannot be canceled while transmission of another job is in progress. Wait until transmission is
finished and then cancel the stored job.
Follow the steps below to cancel (delete) a fax job:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until the job that you wish to cancel
appears in the display and press the
[CLEAR] key ( ).
The job to be canceled is
selected.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "3:MEMORY STATUS" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
4
Selection
"3:MEMORY STATUS"
Press the [ENTER] key.
The selected job is deleted.
5
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to exit.
62
!AR-FX13_sec.book
63 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
RECEIVING FAXES
You can set the machine to one of three modes of reception, AUTO, MAN. , or A.M. (Answering Machine).
To select the reception mode, press the [RECEPTION MODE] key until the desired reception mode appears in the
display.
NOV 05 WED 8:20 AM
STAD-BY
AUTO 100%
USING AUTO MODE
Select AUTO mode when you only want to receive faxes on your telephone line. The machine will automatically
answer all calls and receive incoming faxes.
USING MAN. MODE
MAN. is the most convenient mode for receiving phone calls if you have an extension phone. To have true manual
mode, the machine must be set to not answer while in MANUAL mode (See "SETTING THE NUMBER OF RINGS
FOR MANUAL RECEPTION" (p.29)). You can also receive faxes; however, all calls must first be answered by
picking up the receiver on the extension phone or telephone connected to the same line.
USING A.M. MODE
Select this mode when an answering machine is connected to the machine and you want the answering machine to
answer all calls. This allows you to receive both voice messages and faxes when you are out.
63
4
!AR-FX13_sec.book
64 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
OPTIONAL RECEPTION SETTINGS
The machine has various optional settings for the reception of faxes.
TWO-SIDED RECEPTION (AR-208D only)
This function is used to print a received fax consisting of two or more pages of the same size on both sides of the
paper. Even if the pages are in different orientations, the pages are rotated appropriately to enable printing on both
sides of the paper.
Note
The two-sided reception function cannot be used when printing a transaction report or activity report.
To use this feature, follow this procedure:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "24:2-SIDED RX" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"24:2-SIDED RX"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
64
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
65 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
HOW TO USE THE FAX FUNCTION
RECEIVE REDUCE
You may on occasion receive faxes that are larger than the paper loaded in the machine. To ensure that you do not
lose any part of the original, you should use the Receive Reduce function, which scales the fax to the printing paper
size.
Note
In some cases the size or resolution of a received fax may not permit reduction. When this happens the fax will be
printed at full size and divided onto multiple sheets of paper.
To use this feature, follow this procedure:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "16:RCV REDUCE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"16:RCV REDUCE"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF".
)
If you "2:OFF" (No
reduction) large faxes will
be printed on two sheets
of paper.
65
4
!AR-FX13_sec.book
66 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
WHEN USING MANUAL SENDING
AND RECEIVING
You need to use the [SPEAKER] key or an extension telephone to perform manual sending and receiving. For
information about connecting an extension telephone See "CONNECTING OTHER DEVICES" (p.12).
1
When the extension telephone rings,
pick up the handset and converse.
If the [SPEAKER] key is used to answer a call
you cannot converse.
Note
2
You cannot use the [SPEAKER] key for fax
transmission/reception while copying is in
progress.
When the handset is off hook or the
[SPEAKER] key is used, press the
[START] key ( ).
MANUAL MODE
1:SEND,
2:RECEIVE
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to
select "1:SEND" or "2:RECEIVE", and then press
the [ENTER] key or [START] key (
).
66
!AR-FX13_sec.book
5
67 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 5
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
MEMORY
Your machine has a memory area that can be used to store both incoming faxes and outgoing originals.
● Approximately 120 pages of average content can be held in memory for transmission and reception. Less can be
held if any of the pages were scanned using fine or superfine resolution.
Substitute Reception into Memory
This is a back-up function that is automatically activated if your fax runs out of paper, the TD cartridge needs
replacement (See the Operation Manual for general information.), or the paper jams.
• If you received originals in memory because the fax ran out of paper, be sure to add paper which is the same size
as the paper previously used. If not, the original print-out size may not match the size of the printing paper.
Note
Take care that the remaining memory does not become 7% or less, or you cannot receive any more faxes.
When the machine is idle, the LCD shows the stand-by memory available. (See "ABOUT THE LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY" (p.16))
67
!AR-FX13_sec.book
68 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
DATA TRANSFER
If there is a problem with the machine, you can use the Data Transfer function to have received faxes read into
memory and then sent to a different fax machine for printing.
This function is used when you cannot print received faxes, for example when the machine runs out of toner, or a
misfeed occurs.
To use this function, the fax number of the transfer destination machine must be programmed.
Your fax machine
Receiving fax machine
beep
Enter the fax number of
the fax machine your
want to transfer the data to.
FW. RX DATA
1=YES
2=NO
Select data transfer mode
Transferred faxes
are printed
[Preparation]
Note
Transfer is only possible when a received fax is being held in memory because printing was not possible. In this
case, "0:RX DATA TRANSFER" will appear in the display.
Follow these steps to program the fax number of the transfer destination machine:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
4
Enter the fax number of the transfer
destination machine with the numeric
keys and press the [ENTER] key.
Enter the transferring fax
number (maximum 40
digits) by pressing the
numeric keys.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "0:RX DATA TRANSFER"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"0:RX DATA TRANSFER"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:FAX NUMBER" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:FAX NUMBER"
68
5
Enter the name of the transfer
destination with the numeric keys and
press the [ENTER] key.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
69 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Follow these steps to use the fax transfer function:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "0:RX DATA TRANSFER"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"0:RX DATA TRANSFER"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:DATA TRANSFER" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:DATA TRANSFER"
4
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:YES" appears, and then press
the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:YES"
The received fax is transferred.
To cancel the transfer, select "2:NO" and press the
[ENTER] key.
If "NOT STORED FW.#" appears:
The transfer destination number has not been
programmed. Program the number and then transfer
the fax.
Note
If you set the data transfer mode, when data
cannot be transferred because the other fax
machine was busy, or when the error
condition on your fax machine is corrected,
the data does not print out. To print the data,
turn off the power to the fax machine, then
turn it on again.
69
!AR-FX13_sec.book
70 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TRANSMISSION RESERVATION
When your fax is busy receiving an original or transmitting an original from memory, you can "reserve" a
transmission by setting the original (either in the RSPF or on the document glass), reading it into memory, and
entering the fax number. Once the current operation is completed, your fax will automatically dial the number and
transmit the original saving you from having to wait.
When Using the RSPF:
1
2
When placing the Original on the Table:
Confirm that there are no originals on
the document glass and that copying
is not in progress, then gently close
the RSPF.
1
Confirm that there are no original(s) in
the RSPF, and open the RSPF.
2
Place the original face down on the
document glass. Align the original
according to the original scale in the
illustration below. (Line up the center
of the edge of the original with the
(
) mark.)
Adjust the original guides to the width
of your original.
Original
scale
3
Place the original face up and push it
gently into the RSPF. The top edge of
the original should enter the fax first.
Original face up
4
Adjust the resolution
and/or contrast settings if
desired.
3
Enter the number of the receiving
machine using one of the following
methods:
• Press a Rapid key.
If you press a Rapid Key, the next step is not
necessary.
The number will be dialed once the current
operation is completed, and transmission will
begin once the connection is made.
• Press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and enter a
Speed Dial number.
• Enter a full number with the numeric keys.
5
mark
Note
When using the document glass, do not set
original(s) in the RSPF.
4
If needed, set the original size,
resolution, and contrast. (See
"DIALING AND TRANSMITTING"
(p.59))
5
Press the [START] key ( ) to scan
the page into memory. If you have
more than one original to read into
memory, place the next page, and
press the [START] key ( ) to read
each page.
6
Press the [#] key.
Press the [START] key ( ) if you
entered a Speed Dial number or a full
number.
• The number will be dialed once the current
operation is completed, and transmission will
begin once the connection is made.
70
Gently close the RSPF.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
71 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
BROADCASTING
This function allows you to send the same original to as many as 100 different locations with just one operation.
Once the original is loaded, it is scanned and stored in memory. The fax numbers you have entered are then
automatically dialed in succession, and the original is transmitted to each location.
beep
Recipient A
Your fax machine
ory
mem
Fax received
Faxes sent beep
in order
Recipient B
Select
broadcast sending
Original is scanned
into memory
Fax received
beep
Recipient C
Fax received
1
Place the original face up and push it
gently into the original feeder tray.
3
Original face up
2
Dial the numbers of the receiving
machines using one or more of the
following methods:
• Press one or more Rapid keys.
• Enter Speed Dial numbers with the numeric
keys.
• Press one or more Group keys.
• Enter a number with the numeric keys.
Press the [BROADCAST] key.
4
Press the [ENTER] key.
To enter another fax number, return to step 3.
Adjust the resolution
and/or contrast settings if
desired.
5
Press the [START] key (
).
Transmission will begin.
Note
Adjust the resolution and contrast settings
after the [BROADCAST] key has been
pressed.
71
5
!AR-FX13_sec.book
72 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Broadcasting using a Group key
If the fax machines to which you want to broadcast have all been programmed into one Group key, you can perform
the broadcasting operation using the following simplified procedure. Refer to "STORING NUMBERS UNDER
GROUP KEYS" (p.45).
1
Place the original face up and push it
gently into the document feeder tray.
Original face up
2
Adjust the resolution
and/or contrast settings if
desired.
Press the appropriate Group key.
Transmission will begin.
72
!AR-FX13_sec.book
73 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
POLLING
Polling allows you to request another fax machine to send an original to your fax machine. In other words, the
receiving fax machine, not the transmitting fax machine, activates the transmission. You can use your fax to both
poll and be polled by others.
Serial polling can be used to poll multiple fax machines (maximum of 100) in a single operation.
POLLING
You can request that another fax machine send you the original that is set in that fax machine. You can perform a
polling operation at a scheduled time. (See "TIMER OPERATIONS" (p.79))
Polling fax
beep
Select polling
Other fax memory
Fax received
sending
polling
memory
Original is set
Original is scanned
into memory
Polling is approved
Follow these steps to use the polling function:
1
3
Press the [MENU] key.
Dial the number of the fax machine
you want to poll using one of the
following methods:
• Press a Rapid Key.
If you press a Rapid Key, the next step is not
necessary.
• Press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and enter a
two-digit Speed Dial number.
• Enter the fax number with the numeric keys.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "8:POLLING MODE" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"8:POLLING MODE"
)
Note
4
A group key can be pressed to perform
serial polling. Fax reception will take place in
the order that the destinations are stored in
the Group Key.
Press the [START] key (
).
73
5
!AR-FX13_sec.book
74 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
SERIAL POLLING
You can poll several fax machines one at a time with a single serial polling operation.
A maximum of 100 fax machines can be polled in one serial polling operation.
memory
Other fax A
memory
Original is set
Original is scanned
into memory
polling
Polling is approved
beep
Polling fax
sending
Fax
received
beep
Select serial polling
Fax received
Next fax machine is polled
sending
memory
Repeated for the
next fax machine
Other fax B
memory
Original is set
Original is scanned
into memory
Polling is approved
Follow these steps to use the serial polling function:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
4
Press the [ENTER] key.
Repeat steps 3 and 4
until all numbers have
been entered. After
entering the last number,
go to step 5.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "9:SERIAL POLL MODE" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"9:SERIAL POLL MODE"
3
Dial the number of the fax machine
you want to poll using one of the
following methods:
• Press a Rapid Key or a Group Key.
• Press the [SPEED/SEARCH] key and enter a
two-digit Speed Dial number.
• Enter a fax number with the numeric keys.
74
5
Press the [START] key (
).
!AR-FX13_sec.book
75 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
POLLING TRANSMISSION (MEMORY POLLING)
This function is used to transmit an original that has been scanned into memory to a fax machine that polls your fax
machine. If desired, polling fax machines can be restricted to machines whose fax numbers have been programmed
in your machine ("RESTRICTING POLLING MACHINES (POLLING SECURITY)" on page 77).
To let other fax machines poll your fax machine, the original to be transmitted must be scanned into memory and the
reception mode of your machine must be set to "Auto".
You can select whether polling transmission will take place once or repeatedly. If once is selected, the original that
was scanned into memory will be automatically deleted after polling transmission takes place. If repeated polling
transmission is selected, the original will remain in memory until it is deleted.
More than one original can be scanned into polling memory (all originals will transmitted when your machine is
polled).
Only one memory polling operation can be set up, and the polling machine must be capable of polling reception.
The original(s) in polling memory will be transmitted when a fax machine calls your fax machine and requests polling
transmission. Automatic fax reception is possible while your machine is on polling transmission standby.
Your fax
machine
ory
mem
Select memory polling
The original is read
into memory
Polling is
approved
Original is sent
from memory
polling
Polling fax
machine
beep
5
Select polling
Original is received
Setting up polling transmission:
Place the original in the RSPF or on the document glass and perform the following steps:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the number of times polling
transmission will take place and press
the [ENTER] key.
"1:1 TIME" or
"2:REPEAT" can be
selected as the number
of polling operations
allowed.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
4
Press the [START] key (
).
Selection
"7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
75
!AR-FX13_sec.book
76 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Adding a original to polling memory:
Deleting originals from polling memory:
Use this procedure to add an original to another
original that has already been scanned into polling
memory. Place the original in the RSPF or on the
document glass and follow the steps below.
Follow the steps below to delete originals that have
been scanned into polling memory.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
Selection
"7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
"7:MEMORY POLL MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:SET" appears, and then press
the [ENTER] key.
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
until "2:CLEAR" appears, and then
press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
Selection
"1:SET"
"2:CLEAR"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the number of times polling
transmission will take place and press
the [ENTER] key.
"1:1 TIME" or
"2:REPEAT" can be
selected as the number
of polling operations
allowed.
5
76
Press the [START] key (
).
4
Press the [START] key ..
)
!AR-FX13_sec.book
77 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
RESTRICTING POLLING MACHINES (POLLING SECURITY)
If you wish to allow only specified fax machines to poll your fax machine, enable polling security and program the fax
numbers of the machines that are to be allowed to poll your machine. When this is done, polling will take place when
the fax number of the polling machine matches one of the fax numbers that have been programmed in your machine.
Up to 10 passcode numbers (fax numbers of machines that are allowed to poll your machine) can be programmed.
To enable polling security and program passcode numbers, see "Programming/deleting passcode numbers:" on page 78.
[Preparation]
[When polling]
Polling fax
beep
Enter the fax number
for your fax machine
Select polling or serial polling
Fax is received
sending
polling
Enter the fax number of
fax machines you want
to allow to poll your fax
machine
Entered fax
number
Permitted fax
number
numbers
match
These two numbers are compared
polling allowed
Fax being
polled
[Preparation]
Follow these steps to enable polling security:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
4
Press the [ ] key (
to select "1:ON".
) or [
] key (
)
Selection
"1:ON"
To turn off polling security, select "2:OFF".
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
5
Press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "12:SECURITY SELECT"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"12:SECURITY SELECT"
77
5
!AR-FX13_sec.book
78 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Programming/deleting passcode numbers:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "2:ENTRY MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:PASSCODE # MODE"
appears, and then press the [ENTER]
key.
Selection
"4:PASSCODE # MODE"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:SET" and press the
[ENTER] key.
)
Selection
"1:SET"
To delete a passcode number:
Select "2:CLEAR" and press the [ENTER] key.
5
Enter a two-digit number that will be
used to identify the passcode number
and then press the [ENTER] key.
To delete a passcode
number:
Enter the two-digit
number that identifies the
passcode number and
press the [ENTER] key.
The passcode is deleted.
78
Enter the passcode (fax number of the
machine to be allowed to poll your
machine) with the numeric keys and
press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
"2:ENTRY MODE"
3
6
!AR-FX13_sec.book
79 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TIMER OPERATIONS
The timer function allows you to set a transmission or polling operation to be performed automatically at a time you
specify. Up to five transmission operations or polling operations can be set at any one time, and the times they will
be performed can be specified up to a week in advance.
You can use this function, for example, to take advantage of lower night time telephone rates without having to be
there when the operation is performed.
● For a timer transmission, scan the original into memory when you set the transmission. Scanning the original into
memory is convenient because you do not have to worry about original mix-ups or forgetting to load the original.
● If the memory becomes full while the original is being scanned, "MEMORY FULL" will appear in the display.
• Press the [START] key (
) to transmit the pages that have been stored up to that point in memory.
• Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to cancel the entire transmission.
Your fax machine
Recipient
ory
• Select the recipient
-sending method
-time
• Select transmission
settings
beep
mem
The scheduled
time arrives
Transmission begins
Transmission
/reception
Setting up a timer transmission job:
1
4
Press the [MENU] key.
Enter the time at which transmission
will take place with the numeric keys.
Enter two digits for the
hour and two digits for
the minute.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "1:TIMER MODE" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "AM" or "PM" and press the
[ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:TIMER MODE"
3
Press the [ ] key (
to select "1:SET".
) or [
] key (
)
Selection
"1:SET"
To cancel a timer operation, select "2:CLEAR".
79
5
!AR-FX13_sec.book
80 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
6
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select the day of the week and
press the [ENTER] key.
)
9
Enter the fax number of the other
machine using one of the following
methods:
• Press a Rapid key.
If you press a Rapid Key, the next step is not
necessary.
• Enter a Speed Dial number with the numeric
keys.
• Enter the fax number with the numeric keys.
10
7
Press the [ENTER] key.
8
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the transmission mode and
press the [ENTER] key.
Press the [START] key (
).
The selections are as
follows:
1:SEND MODE
2:BROADCAST MODE
3:POLLING MODE
4:SERIAL POLL MODE
CANCELING A TIMER TRANSMISSION JOB
After a timer transmission job is set up, the job goes on standby until the specified time of transmission. If necessary,
the MEMORY STATUS function can be used to cancel a timer transmission job that is on standby ("CANCELING
(DELETING) A STORED FAX JOB" on page 62).
80
!AR-FX13_sec.book
81 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
ANTI JUNK FAX
You can avoid wasting fax paper by using the Anti Junk Fax function. This function blocks reception of faxes from up
to ten specified parties.
To turn the Anti Junk Fax feature on and off, use the following procedure:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "5:ANTI JUNK FAX" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"5:ANTI JUNK FAX"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:ANTI JUNK SELECT" and
press the [ENTER] key.
5
Selection
"1:ANTI JUNK SELECT"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "1:ON" or "2:OFF" and press
the [ENTER] key.
Select "1:ON" to enable
the function.
Select "2:OFF" to disable
the function.
5
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
81
!AR-FX13_sec.book
82 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To store junk fax numbers, use the following procedure:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "5:ANTI JUNK FAX" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Note
Selection
"5:ANTI JUNK FAX"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "2:JUNK FAX #" and press
the [ENTER] key.
Enter a two-digit number from 01 to 10
that will identify the anti junk number
and press the [ENTER] key.
If you enter a two-digit number that already
has a fax number stored, "#xx
STORED:CHANGE?" will appear. To
change the fax number that has been stored
under that 2-digit number, press the [
]
key (
) or [
] key (
) to select "YES",
press the [ENTER] key, and enter the new
fax number.
6
Enter the fax number with the numeric
keys and press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [MENU] key.
Selection
"2:JUNK FAX #"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:SET" and press the
[ENTER] key.
Selection
"1:SET"
82
)
If you wish to store
another fax number,
return to step 5.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
83 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
To clear junk fax numbers, use the following procedure:
1
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [ENTER] key.
If you wish to store
another fax number,
return to step 5.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "5:ANTI JUNK FAX" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"5:ANTI JUNK FAX"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select "2:JUNK FAX #" and press
the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"2:JUNK FAX #"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "2:CLEAR" and press the
[ENTER] key.
5
)
Selection
"2:CLEAR"
5
Press the numeric keys to enter the
two-digit number (01 to 10) that
identifies the fax number you wish to
delete.
83
!Chapter05.fm
84 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後6時24分
OPERATION IN COPY, PRINTER,
SCANNER, AND FAX MODES
Some operations cannot be performed simultaneously when the machine is being used in printer mode, copy mode,
scanner mode, and fax mode.
Modes
Copy
Key entry
Copy
Printer
Copying
Printing
Scanning
from a
machine
Scanning
from a
computer
Transmission
Reception
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes*1
Yes*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
During copying
Scanner
Fax
Printer
Printing
Yes
Scanner
During scanning
No
Fax
transmission
Key entry
No
Yes
No
Yes
During direct
transmission
No
Yes
No
No
During scanning
No
Yes
No
No
During memory
transmission
Yes
Yes
Yes
During manual
reception
Yes
No
During printing
of a received fax
Yes
During memory
reception
Fax reception
Extension phone
*1
*2
*3
*4
Yes
Yes*2
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes*1
Yes*4
Yes
Yes
No*3
No
No
Yes
Yes
No*3
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*3
Yes
Direct transmission and scanning are not possible.
Manual reception and printing of a received fax are not possible.
Only scanning is possible.
Manual reception is not possible.
84
Extension
phone
No
Yes*2
Yes
No
No
!AR-FX13_sec.book
6
85 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRINTING OUT REPORTS
The machine is capable of printing a range of reports on faxing activities as well as various settings you have made.
The reports are described below.
1. TIMER LIST:
You can print a list of timer or dual access operations that are currently set.
P. 01
TIMER LIST
SEP-10-200X FRI 06:30 PM
TIMER MODE
TYPE
FILE RESERVED
RES.
MSG
01
12:12 PM MON
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
X
02
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
X
03
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
04
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
05
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
06
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
07
XX:XX XX XXX
XXXXXXXXX
XXX
X
BOX PAGES CVR.
XX
RECEIVER
X
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
X
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
X
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
XXX
XXX XXX XXX
XX
MEMORY TX
TYPE
FILE
RES.
XXX
XXXXXX
XXX
XXX
XXXXXX
XXX
MSG
X
BOX PAGES CVR.
XX
RECEIVER
X
X
XX
X
X
XX
REMOTE TX
#
TYPE
RES.
XXXX
1
MSG
TIMES
PAGES CVR.
X
XXXX
X
XXXX
2. ACTIVITY REPORT:
You can print out a list of faxes sent and received as well as the sender or recipient and the time of the
operation, etc.
P.01
ACTIVITY REPORT (SEND)
SEP-1 0 -2 0 0 X FRI 0 6 :3 0 PM
#
RECEIVER
DATE START TIME
XX
SEP-10
XX:XX PM
COM.TIME PAGES
XX
X:XX:XX
XX
TOTAL
X:XX:XX
XX
GRAND TOTAL
X:XX:XX
XX
TYPE/NOTE
XXXXXXX
XXXXX
FILE
XXX
3. TELEPHONE # LIST:
You can print out a list of number stored in rapid dialing and speed dialing.
P. 01
TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST
S EP -10-200X F R I 06: 30 P M
RECEIVER'S FAX #
RAPID/SPEED #
INTL TX SET RECEIVER'S NAME
RXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
RXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
4. GROUP LIST:
You can print out a list of group dialing numbers.
P.01
GROUP LIST
SEP-10-200X FRI 06:30 PM
#
GROUP NAME
RECEIVER
GXX
XXXX
RAPID #
GXX
XXXX
SPEED #
: XXX XXX
GXX
XXXX
FAX #
: XXXXXXX
SPEED #
FAX #
: XX
: XXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXX
: XXXXXX
85
!AR-FX13_sec.book
86 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. PASSCODE LIST:
You can print a list of your fax information and polling security information.
PASSCODE LIST
SEP-10-200X FRI 06:30 PM
POLL SECURITY
SYSTEM #
XXXX
XXXX
ID #
01
XXXX
02
XXXX
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
PASSCODE #
01
XXXXXXXXXX
02
XXXXXXXXXX
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
SENDER'S NAME
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SENDER'S #
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FW. STA. NAME
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FW. STATION #
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
6. JUNK FAX # LIST:
Fax numbers designated as Anti Junk Fax numbers.
JUNK FAX# LIST
SEP-10-200X FRI 06:30 PM
A N T I J U N K FA X #
#
86
01
X
02
XXXXXXXXXX
10
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
!AR-FX13_sec.book
87 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. USER PROGRAM LIST:
Currently activated USER PROGRAM settings.
USER PROGRAM LIST
S EP -10-200X F R I 06: 30 P M
ITEM
MENU #
SETTING
1
DOC. GLASS SIZE
8.5x11
2
FIXED DOC. SIZE
8.5x11
3
RESO. PRIORITY
STANDARD
4
#OF RINGS AUTO RX
02TIME(S)
5
#OF RINGS MANUAL RX
00TIME(S)
6
AUTO LISTING
OFF
7
PRINT SELECTION
SEND : ERROR ONLY
BD : ALWAYS PRINTS
RCV : NEVER PRINTS
IMAGE : ERROR ONLY
8
RECALL TIMES (BUSY)
02TIME(S)
9
RECALL TIMES (LINE ERROR)
01TIME(S)
10
RECALL INTERVAL (BUSY)
03MIN.
11
RECALL INTERVAL (LINE ERROR)
01MIN.
12
SECURITY SELECTION
ON
13
FAX REMOTE NUMBER
5
14
REMOTE RECEPTION
ON
15
FAX SIGNAL AUTO RECEIVE
ON
16
AUTO RCV REDUCE
ON
17
BEEP LENGTH
3SEC
18
RINGER VOLUME
MIDDLE
19
BEEPER VOLUME
LOW
20
DIAL MODE
TONE
21
DISTINCTIVE RING
OFF
22
INDEX PRINT
OFF
23
DATE&TIME FORMAT SET
TIME : 12HOUR
24
2-SIDED RX
DATE : MMDDYYYY
OFF
Use the following procedure to print out reports:
1
Press the [REPORT] key.
2
Press the [REPORT] key to select the
report that you wish to print.
3
Press the [ENTER] key.
6
87
!AR-FX13_sec.book
88 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TROUBLESHOOTING
ACTIVITY REPORT AUTO LISTING
This setting is used to automatically print the Activity Report for transmissions and receptions. The Activity Report
will automatically print when information on a total of 50 fax transmissions and receptions accumulates. Once
information on 50 transmissions/receptions accumulates, the oldest transaction is deleted each time a new
transaction takes place.
1
Press the [MENU] key.
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "6:AUTO LISTING" appears, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"6:AUTO LISTING"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key (
to select "1:ON" and press the
[ENTER] key.
)
Selection
"1:ON"
To disable automatic printing, select "2:OFF" and
press the [ENTER] key.
5
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
88
!AR-FX13_sec.book
89 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRINTING TRANSACTION REPORTS
The machine can be set to print a transaction report after each transmission, reception, and/or error. The printing
condition can be selected separately for three types of transaction reports: "TRANSMISSION LIST", "BROADCAST
LIST", and "RECEPTION LIST". For each type of report, select one of the following printing conditions:
"ALWAYS PRINTS" ...After each transmission, reception, or error.
"ERROR ONLY".........After an error only.
"NEVER PRINTS" ......Never prints.
Note
Part of the transmitted fax can be printed on the transaction report (IMAGE MEM. PRINT setting).
To set the machine to print transaction reports, follow these steps:
1
Press the [MENU] key.
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the printing condition and
press the [ENTER] key.
The selections are as
follows:
1:ALWAYS PRINTS
2:ERROR ONLY
3:NEVER PRINTS
2
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "4:USER PROGRAM" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the [MENU] key to
exit.
Selection
"4:USER PROGRAM"
3
6
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
until "7:PRINT SELECTION" appears,
and then press the [ENTER] key.
Selection
"7:PRINT SELECTION"
4
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )
to select the type of transaction report
and press the [ENTER] key.
The selections are as
follows:
1:TRANSMISSION
2:BROADCAST
3:RECEPTION
4:IMAGE MEM. PRINT
"4: IMAGE MEM. PRINT" can be enabled to have part
of the transmitted fax printed on the transaction report.
89
!AR-FX13_sec.book
90 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Dialing cannot be done.
No transmission takes place.
Nothing is printed at the
receiving end.
Cause and solution
The telephone line cord is not correctly connected to the
machine and the wall telephone jack.
→ Make sure the telephone line cord is securely connected.
Page
11
The receiving machine is out of paper.
→ Check with the operator of the receiving machine.
-
The receiving machine does not support the G3 standard.
→ Check with the operator of the receiving machine.
-
An error is displayed.
→ Check the display of the machine.
91
If a blank sheet of paper is output together with a normally
received fax, the machine's paper size setting may be different
from the size of paper actually loaded in the machine.
→ Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of paper
loaded in the machine.
29
Noise on the line may cause a distorted image. Try sending the
A distorted image is received at fax again, or make a copy on your machine and see if the copy
is distorted.
the other end.
→ If the image is still distorted, consult the retailer or dealer where
you bought the machine.
-
The transmitting machine may be using a light contrast setting.
→ Ask the operator of the transmitting machine to send the fax using
a darker contrast setting.
-
Noise on the line may cause a distorted image.
→ Ask the operator of the transmitting machine to send the fax
again.
-
The received original is faint.
Received images are distorted.
The TD cartridge may be running out of toner.
→ Replace the TD cartridge.
Note
90
Operation
Manual
(for general
information)
If your problem cannot be solved by carrying out the instructions in the Check and Remedy column above, please
contact your authorized SHARP dealer.
!AR-FX13_sec.book
91 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
MESSAGES AND SIGNALS
DISPLAY MESSAGES
Message
Cause and remedy
Page
FRONT OR SIDE COVER OPEN. The cover is open. Close the cover.
CLOSE COVERS.
See the
OPERATION
MANUAL
(for general
information)
CLOSE THE SPF/RSPF COVER.
The RSPF cover is open. Close the RSPF cover.
CLEAR PAPER JAM.
SPF/RSPF JAM.
A paper misfeed has occurred. Remove the misfeed as
explained in "MISFEED REMOVAL". (See the OPERATION
MANUAL for general information.)
MEMORY FULL
The memory is full.
62
LOAD XXX SIZE PAPER
INTO TRAY1
The setting for the printing paper size is incorrect. Set it
correctly. "8.5x11", "8.5x14", or "A4" will appear in "XXX" in the
message.
29
Toner cartridge is empty.
Toner cartridge is not inserted.
See the
OPERATION
MANUAL
(for general
information)
CAN NOT PRINT
NO XXX SIZE TRAY
CHANGE TRAY SETTING
Paper tray is not set to the appropriate paper size. Change the
paper size setting of the paper tray to the size indicated in the
message, and load that size of paper in the paper tray.
"8.5x11", "8.5x14", or "A4" will appear in "XXX" in the
message.
-
AUDIBLE SIGNALS
Sound Type
Duration
Meaning
Continuous tone
3 seconds
Indicates the end of transmission, reception, or line error.
Continuous tone
1 second
Warning tone
91
6
!AR-FX13_sec.book
92 ページ
7
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
Chapter 7
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS
Applicable telephone line
Public switched telephone network
Compression method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission modes
Super G3, G3 (the machine can only send faxes to and receive faxes from
machines that support G3 or Super G3)
Scanning method
CCD flatbed scanning
Scanning resolution
(supports ITU-T standards)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Fine, Fine + Halftone)
8 x 15.4 lines/mm (Super Fine, Super Fine + Halftone)
Recording method
Laser, electrostatic charge method
Transmission speed
33.6 kbps
Transmission time
Approx. 2 seconds (Super G3 mode / 33.6 kbps, JBIG),
Approx. 6 seconds (G3 ECM mode / 14.4 kbps, JBIG)
Paper size
8-1/2" x 11"(Letter), 8-1/2" x 14"(Legal), or A4
Effective recording width
8-1/2" max. (8-1/2" x 14" printing)
Transmittable original size
When using the RSPF
Maximum
One-sided original: 8-1/2" x 19.7"
Two-sided original: 8-1/2" x 14"
Minimum
8-1/2" x 5-1/2"
When using the document glass
Maximum 8-1/2" x 14"
Effective scanning width
8-1/2" maximum
Halftone transmission
256 levels
Contrast (exposure) adjustment
Light, Medium, Dark
Extension telephone connection
Possible (1 telephone)
Auto dialing
Combined total of 18 One-Touch Dial and Group keys; 100 Speed Dial
numbers; redialing (automatic)
Timer transmission
Yes
Automatic document feeding
Yes (50 pages)
Memory capacity
2 MB
Error Correction Mode(ECM)
Yes
2.4 kbps Automatic fallback
* As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production machines. There may be some deviations from these values in individual machines.
92
!AR-FX13_sec.book
93 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INDEX
A
Alarm beeps
- Alarm beep volume .......................................... 19
- Length of alarm beeps ..................................... 18
Answering machine................................................. 48
- Answering machine backup ............................. 49
- Quiet detect time .............................................. 48
Arrow keys ........................................................ 15, 16
Automatic dialing
- Group keys....................................................... 45
- Rapid key dialing.............................................. 42
- Speed dialing ................................................... 42
B
Beep volume ........................................................... 16
Bypass tray paper guides........................................ 13
C
Clear numbers
- Group keys....................................................... 47
- Rapid key dialing.............................................. 44
- Speed dialing ................................................... 44
Connecting
- Other devices ................................................... 12
- Telephone line cord ......................................... 11
Contrast................................................................... 55
Cover sheet............................................................. 56
D
Dialing
- Direct keypad dialing........................................ 59
- Rapid key dialing.............................................. 59
- Redialing .......................................................... 61
- Search.............................................................. 61
- Speed dialing ................................................... 59
- Using the [SPEAKER] key ............................... 60
Display .............................................................. 14, 16
Distinctive ringing .................................................... 41
Document glass ...................................................... 13
E
Entering your name and fax number....................... 21
F
Fax main menu ........................................................ 6
Fax setup
- Date and time.................................................. 22
- Daylight saving time setting ............................ 25
- Dial mode ........................................................ 31
- Distinctive ringing ............................................ 41
- How to enter characters .................................. 20
- Index function.................................................. 36
- Number of recall times .................................... 32
- Number of rings for auto reception.................. 28
- Number of rings for manual reception............. 29
- Recall interval.................................................. 34
- Reception mode .............................................. 27
- Reception paper size ...................................... 29
- Remote reception............................................ 39
- Resolution priority ........................................... 37
- Transmission mode......................................... 26
- Setting the tray selection................................. 30
- Your name and fax number............................. 21
H
Handles .................................................................. 13
I
Index function ......................................................... 36
L
Line jack ................................................................. 13
List of fax functions .................................................. 6
M
Memory .................................................................. 67
Message function ................................................... 57
Messages and signals............................................ 91
O
Operation panel......................................................
Optional transmission settings
- Cover sheet.....................................................
- Message function ............................................
- Two-sided original ...........................................
Originals .................................................................
- Original size ....................................................
- Setting the original ..........................................
- Size and weight...............................................
- Two-sided original ...........................................
- Unsuitable originals.........................................
56
57
58
50
54
52
50
58
51
P
Paper output tray....................................................
Paper output tray extension ...................................
Paper tray...............................................................
PC modem .............................................................
Power cord .............................................................
Power switch ..........................................................
13
13
13
38
13
13
13
Q
Quick reference guide .............................................. 3
93
!AR-FX13_sec.book
94 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
R
Receiving faxes....................................................... 63
- Receive reduce ................................................ 65
- Two-sided reception......................................... 64
Reception mode
- A.M. mode.................................................. 27, 63
- AUTO mode ............................................... 27, 63
- MAN. mode ................................................ 27, 63
Remote reception.................................................... 39
Reports
- Group list.......................................................... 85
- Junk fax # list ................................................... 86
- Passcode list.................................................... 86
- Telephone # list................................................ 85
- Timer list .......................................................... 85
- Transaction reports .......................................... 89
- Transmissions activity report ..................... 85, 88
- User program list.............................................. 87
Resolution ............................................................... 55
Ringing volume ....................................................... 17
RSPF....................................................................... 13
- Document feeder cover.................................... 13
- Document feeder tray ...................................... 13
- Exit area ........................................................... 13
- Original guides ................................................. 13
S
Specifications .......................................................... 92
Storing numbers
- Group keys....................................................... 45
- Rapid key dialing.............................................. 42
- Speed dialing ................................................... 42
T
TEL jack .................................................................. 13
Transmission mode
- Direct transmission .......................................... 26
- Memory transmission ....................................... 26
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 90
94
!AR-FX13_sec.book
95 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
INDEX BY PURPOSE
Fax setup
Storing/settings
Connecting the telephone line cord......................... 11
Daylight saving time setting .................................... 25
Dial mode ................................................................ 31
Distinctive ringing .................................................... 41
Entering your name and fax number....................... 21
How to enter characters .......................................... 20
Index function.......................................................... 36
Number of recall times ............................................ 32
Number of rings for auto reception.......................... 28
Number of rings for manual reception .....................29
Recall interval ..........................................................34
Reception mode ......................................................27
Reception paper size .............................................. 29
Remote reception.................................................... 39
Resolution priority ................................................... 37
Setting the date and time ........................................ 22
Transmission mode................................................. 26
Tray selection.......................................................... 30
Clear numbers
- Group keys......................................................
- Rapid key dialing.............................................
- Speed dialing ..................................................
Contrast..................................................................
Enter characters .....................................................
Original size ...........................................................
Resolution ..............................................................
Storing numbers
- Group key........................................................
- Rapid key dialing.............................................
- Speed dialing ..................................................
47
44
44
55
20
54
55
45
42
42
Faxes, sending and receiving
Dialing
- Chain dialing .................................................... 60
- Direct keypad dialing ........................................59
- Redialing .......................................................... 61
- Speed dialing ................................................... 59
- Using the [SPEAKER] key ............................... 60
Receiving faxes....................................................... 63
- Manual receiving .............................................. 66
- Optional reception settings .............................. 64
Sending originals
- Dialing and transmitting ................................... 59
- Manual sending................................................ 66
- Optional transmission settings ......................... 54
- Setting the original ........................................... 52
Special functions
Anti junk fax............................................................. 81
Broadcasting ........................................................... 71
Data transfer ........................................................... 68
Memory polling........................................................ 75
Polling ..................................................................... 73
Polling security ........................................................ 77
Reservation ............................................................. 70
Serial polling............................................................ 74
Timer operations ..................................................... 79
95
!AR-FX13_sec.book
96 ページ
MEMO
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
!AR-FX13_sec.book
97 ページ
MEMO
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
!AR-FX13_sec.book
98 ページ
MEMO
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
!AR-FX13_sec.book
1 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
NOTICE FOR USERS IN
CANADA
AVIS POUR NOS
UTILISATEURS AU CANADA
"NOTICE : This product meets the applicable Industry
Canada technical specifications."
AVIS : Le présent matériel est conforme aux
spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie
Canada.
"NOTICE : The Ringer Equivalence Number is an
indication of the maximum number of devices allowed
to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement
that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not
exceed five."
The REN of this equipment is indicated on the
copying machine.
The registration number is indicated on the fax
printed circuit board and on the copying machine.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Remarque : L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface
téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices
d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs
n'excède pas 5.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) de cet
équipement est indiqué sur le copieur.
Le numéro d'enregistrement est indiqué sur la carte
à circuit imprimé du télécopieur et sur le copieur.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
335 Britannia Road East,
Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
Canada
!AR-FX13_sec.book
1 ページ
2007年11月28日 水曜日 午後4時22分
AR-FX13
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
1 Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1164.
www.sharpusa.com
SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.
335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink
to help protect the environment.
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper
PRINTED IN CHINA
2007M
KS1
TINSE1864QSZZ
MODEL
AR-NB2 A
NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
SOFTWARE SETUP GUIDE
(for network printer)
Page
• SAFETY STANDARDS
• INTRODUCTION
• BEFORE INSTALLATION
• SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT
• SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT
2
3
5
10
19
SAFETY STANDARDS
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with
standards.
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
For users in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠
♠
♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠♠ ♠
Notice for Users in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Notice for Users in U.S.A.
Declaration of Conformity
SHARP Network Expansion Kit, AR-NB2 A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible Party: SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430
TEL:
1-800-BE-SHARP
-2-
INTRODUCTION
This manual explains how to configure network settings and install and configure the software to
enable the machine to be used as a network printer.
Trademark acknowledgments
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows
Server® 2003, Windows Vista® and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE LICENSE will appear when you install the software from the CD-ROM. By using all
or any portion of the software on the CD-ROM or in the machine, you are agreeing to be bound by the
terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE.
Note
• The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows® XP in
Windows® environments, and Mac OS X v10.4 in Macintosh environments. The screens may
vary in other versions of the operating systems.
• The explanations in this manual are based on the North American version of the software.
Versions for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version.
• This manual refers to the digital multifunctional system AR-208S/208D as "the machine".
• Where "XX-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model.
• The PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) mentioned in this manual is an option.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual
machine due to product improvements and modifications.
-3-
CONTENTS
SAFETY STANDARDS.......................................................................................................... 2
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................... 3
BEFORE INSTALLATION
CD-ROMS AND SOFTWARE................................................................................................ 5
● CD-ROMS IN THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT ...................................................................... 5
● SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 7
● SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................. 7
CONNECTING TO A NETWORK .......................................................................................... 8
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS ............................................................................................. 8
● HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT ................................................................ 8
USER PROGRAMS FOR THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT.............................................. 9
SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE .......................................................................................... 10
●
●
●
●
INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER ..................................................................................... 10
SHARING THE PRINTER USING WINDOWS NETWORKING ............................................... 13
INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR ................................................................... 15
INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS.................................................................................. 16
USING THE PPD FILE......................................................................................................... 17
● Installing the resident font information for PPD (only when the PPD file is installed in Windows
98/Me) ....................................................................................................................................... 17
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER ............................................................................ 18
SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT
MAC OS X............................................................................................................................ 19
MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2.............................................................................................................. 23
-4-
BEFORE INSTALLATION
CD-ROMS AND SOFTWARE
CD-ROMS IN THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
The network expansion kit contains the following four CD-ROMs: "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1),
"Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2), "Sharpdesk" (Disc 1) and "Sharpdesk" (Disc 2).
Caution
The printer driver, Printer Status Monitor and Printer Administration Utility on the "Software
CD-ROM" cannot be used when the machine is connected to your computer by a USB.
"Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
The "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1) contains the following software programs:
Software for Windows
• Printer driver
These allow the machine to be used as a printer.
- PCL6 and PCL5e printer driver
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5e printer control languages. It is
recommended that you use the PCL6 printer driver. If you have a problem printing from older
software using the PCL6 printer driver, use the PCL5e printer driver.
- PS printer driver
The PS printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language developed by Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
- PPD driver
The PPD driver enables the machine to use the standard Windows PS printer driver.
• Printer Status Monitor
This allows you to check the status of the network printer on your computer screen.
-5-
CD-ROMS AND SOFTWARE
"Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2)
The "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2) contains the following software programs:
Software for Windows
• Printer Administration Utility
This allows the administrator to monitor the machine and configure machine settings from a
computer. To install and use the Printer Administration Utility, see the Readme file and the manual
in PDF format on the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2). The Readme file and manual are in the
following folder on the CD-ROM. (Substitute the letter of your CD-ROM drive for "R" in the
following path.)
R:\Sadmin\Documents\EnglishA
• Online manuals
Manuals in PDF format that are viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Software for Macintosh
• PPD file
This is the printer description file which enables the machine to be used as a PostScript 3
compatible printer. The PS3 expansion kit is required to use the machine in a Macintosh
environment.
• Online manuals
Manuals in PDF format that are viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader.
"Sharpdesk" CD-ROMs (for Windows)
The "Sharpdesk" CD-ROM consists of 2 discs. Sharpdesk is a desktop document management
application that makes it easy to start applications and file documents and images.
For information on the "Sharpdesk" CD-ROMs and the procedure for installing Sharpdesk, see
operation manual for network scanner (PDF format).
-6-
CD-ROMS AND SOFTWARE
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before installing the software described in this manual, make sure that your computer satisfies the
following requirements.
Windows
Macintosh
Operating system*
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista
Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2,
Mac OS X v10.1.5,
Mac OS X v10.2.8,
Mac OS X v10.3.9,
Mac OS X v10.4 to 10.4.10
Computer type
IBM PC/AT compatible computer
Equipped with a 10Base-T/100Base-TX LAN board.
Display
800 x 600 resolution (SVGA) with 256 colors or higher
(32,000 colors (16 bit) or higher is recommended)
Other hardware
requirements
An environment that allows any of the above operating
systems to fully operate.
An environment in which
any of the operating
systems listed above can
fully operate (including
Macintosh computers with
an Intel processor).
* Printing is not possible in MS-DOS mode.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The following requirements must be met to use the software described in this manual.
Operating system
environment
Windows
Software
PCL6 printer driver,
PCL5e printer driver
Required expansion kits
–
PS printer driver,
PPD driver
PS3 expansion kit
Printer Status Monitor
–
Printer Administration Utility
Macintosh
Macintosh PPD driver
PS3 expansion kit
-7-
CONNECTING TO A NETWORK
After the network expansion kit has been installed in the
machine, connect a LAN cable to the LAN connector of
the network expansion kit.
Use a network cable that is shielded.
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS
To check the IP address of the machine, hold down the status button on the network expansion kit at
least 2 seconds to print out a Printer Setting List.
Status button
HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
To reset the network expansion kit, turn on the power while holding down the status button on the
network expansion kit. Continue to hold down the status button until a beep sounds.
Caution
Network scanner destination information and scanning settings will remain after the network
expansion kit is reset, however, the network settings and printer settings will revert to the factory
default settings.
-8-
USER PROGRAMS FOR THE
NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
When the network expansion kit is installed in the machine, the following programs are added to the
user programs for Print mode.
The IP address and other network settings are configured using these user programs.
Note
The procedure for selecting a user program setting is explained in "SELECTING A SETTING FOR
A USER PROGRAM" in the operation manual.
Additional user programs for Print mode
Program
number
4
5
6
7
8
9
Program name
ENABLE TCP/IP
ENABLE DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SETTING
ENABLE
NETWARE
ENABLE
ETHERTALK
ENABLE
NETBEUI
Settings (factory
default settings
appear in bold)
Explanation
1: YES
2: NO
This program must be enabled to use the
machine on a TCP/IP network. "IP ADDRESS
SETTING" must also be configured.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
1: YES
2: NO
If "YES" is selected (factory default setting) and
the machine is connected to a TCP/IP network,
the IP address will be acquired automatically.
If you will manually assign an IP address using
"IP ADDRESS SETTING", select "NO".
• IP ADDRESS
• SUBNETMASK
• DEFAULT GATEWAY
This program is used to set the IP address (IP
address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway) of the
machine when TCP/IP protocol is used on the
network.
When "ENABLE DHCP" is selected, the
machine will obtain an IP address
automatically. This is the factory default setting.
1: YES
2: NO
This program must be enabled to use the
machine on a network that uses NetWare
protocol.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
1: YES
2: NO
This program must be enabled to use the
machine on a network that uses EtherTalk
protocol.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
1: YES
2: NO
This program must be enabled to use the
machine on a network that uses NetBEUI
protocol.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
-9-
SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" (
), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start"
button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the "CD-ROM" icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click
"My Computer" and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon.
3
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
In Windows Vista, if a message screen
appears asking you for confirmation, click
"Allow".
4
The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window
will appear. Make sure that you
understand the contents of the license
agreement, and then click the "Yes"
button.
Note
5
6
Click the "Printer Driver" button.
To view information on the software, click
the "Display Readme" button.
7
Click the "Standard installation" button.
Windows
1
You can show the "SOFTWARE
LICENSE" in a different language by
selecting the desired language from
the language menu. To install the
software in the selected language,
continue the installation with that
language selected.
Note
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next"
button.
- 10 -
When "Custom installation" is
selected, you can change any of the
items below. When "Standard
installation" is selected, the installation
will take place as indicated below.
• Machine connection method: LPR
Direct Print
• Set as default printer: Yes
• Printer driver name: Cannot be
changed
• PCL printer display fonts: Installed
If you selected "Custom installation",
select "LPR Direct Print" and click the
"Next" button.
If you selected other than "LPR Direct
Print", see "SHARING THE PRINTER
USING WINDOWS NETWORKING" (p.13).
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
8
11
Printers connected to the network are
detected. Select the machine and click
the "Next" button.
Select whether or not you wish the
printer to be your default printer and
click the "Next" button.
If you are installing multiple printer drivers,
select the printer that you wish to use as
your default printer.
If you do not wish to set either printer
driver as the default printer, select "No".
Note
If you clicked the "Custom installation"
button in step 7, the following windows
will appear.
• Printer name window
If you wish to change the printer
name, enter the desired name and
click the "Next" button.
Note
10
• Window confirming installation of
the display fonts
To install the display fonts for the
PCL printer driver, select "Yes" and
click the "Next" button.
If you are not installing the PCL
printer driver (you are installing the
PS printer driver), select "No" and
click the "Next" button.
A confirmation window appears. Check
the contents and then click the "Next"
button.
12
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer
driver to be installed and click the
"Next" button.
Select the checkboxes of the printer
drivers to be installed.
Note
13
Note
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the message in the window that
appears and click the "Next" button.
Installation begins.
To use the PS printer driver, the PS3
expansion kit must be installed.
- 11 -
• If you are using Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the
Windows logo test or digital
signature appears, be sure to click
the "Continue Anyway" or "Yes"
button.
• If you are using Windows Vista
If a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this
driver software anyway".
When the installation completed
screen appears, click the "OK" button.
Windows
9
If the machine is not found, make sure
that the machine is powered on and
connected to your computer and then
search again. If the machine is still not
found, use the custom installation
procedure to directly specify the IP
address.
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
14
Click the "Close" button.
Note
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your
computer may appear. In this case,
click the "Yes" button to restart your
computer.
Note
Windows
This completes the installation of the
software.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE
PRINTER DRIVER" (p.18) to check the
printer driver settings.
• To install the Printer Status Monitor, see
"INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS
MONITOR" (p.15).
If you installed the PS printer driver,
the PS display font can be installed
from the "PRINTER UTILITIES"
CD-ROM that accompanied the PS3
expansion kit. (p.16)
- 12 -
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
SHARING THE PRINTER USING WINDOWS NETWORKING
If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to install the printer
driver in the client computer.
Note
To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the operation manual or help file of
your operating system.
"Print server" as explained here, is a computer that is directly connected to the machine, and a
"Client" is any other computer that is connected to the same network.
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" (
), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start"
button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the "CD-ROM" icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click
"My Computer" and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon.
3
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
In Windows Vista, if a message screen
appears asking you for confirmation, click
"Allow".
4
The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement,
and then click the "Yes" button.
Note
5
6
Click the "Printer Driver" button.
To view information on the software, click
the "Display Readme" button.
7
Click the "Custom installation" button.
8
Select "Shared Printer" and click the
"Next" button.
Windows
1
You can show the "SOFTWARE
LICENSE" in a different language by
selecting the desired language from
the language menu. To install the
software in the selected language,
continue the installation with that
language selected.
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next" button.
- 13 -
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
9
11
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
If the shared printer does not appear
in the list, check the settings in the
printer server.
13
When the installation completed
screen appears, click the "OK" button.
14
Click the "Close" button in the window
of step 6.
Note
When the model selection window
appears, select model name of your
machine and click the "Next" button.
• If you are using Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003
If a warning message regarding the
Windows logo test or digital
signature appears, be sure to click
the "Continue Anyway" or "Yes"
button.
• If you are using Windows Vista
If a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this
driver software anyway".
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your
computer may appear. If this message
appears, click the "Yes" button to
restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the
software.
• After installation, see "CONFIGURING THE
PRINTER DRIVER" (p.18) to check the
printer driver settings.
• To install the Printer Status Monitor, see
"INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS
MONITOR" (p.15).
When the printer driver selection
window appears, select the printer
driver to be installed and click the
"Next" button.
Be sure to select the same printer driver
as the printer driver used in the print
server (the machine).
Note
- 14 -
If you installed the PS printer driver,
the PS display font can be installed
from the "PRINTER UTILITIES"
CD-ROM that accompanied the PS3
expansion kit. (p.16)
Windows
Note
10
12
For the port to be used, select the
machine set as a shared printer, and
click the "Next" button.
If you are using Windows 98/Me/2000/XP,
you can also click the "Add Network Port"
button and select the printer to be shared
by browsing the network in the window
that appears. (In Windows Vista, the "Add
Network Port" button does not appear.)
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" (
), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start"
button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the "CD-ROM" icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click
"My Computer" and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon.
3
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
In Windows Vista, if a message screen
appears asking you for confirmation, click
"Allow".
4
The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement,
and then click the "Yes" button.
Note
5
6
Click the "Printer Status Monitor" button.
To view information on the software, click
the "Display Readme" button.
7
Follow the on-screen instructions.
8
When the installation completed screen
appears, click the "Finish" button.
To have the Printer Status Monitor start
automatically when your computer is
started, select the "Add this program to
your Startup folder" checkbox.
9
Click the "Close" button in the window
of step 6.
Windows
1
You can show the "SOFTWARE
LICENSE" in a different language by
selecting the desired language from
the language menu. To install the
software in the selected language,
continue the installation with that
language selected.
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next" button.
Note
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your
computer may appear. If this message
appears, click the "Yes" button to
restart your computer.
This completes the installation.
For the procedures for using the Printer Status
Monitor, see the Help file. Follow these steps to
view the Help file:
Click the Windows "start" button, select "All
Programs" ("Programs" in Windows
98/Me/2000), select "SHARP Printer Status
Monitor" and then select "Help".
- 15 -
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS
The fonts used by the PS printer driver are contained in the "PRINTER UTILITIES" CD-ROM that
accompanied the PS3 expansion kit. Install these fonts as needed for the PS printer driver.
1
4
Insert the "PRINTER UTILITIES"
CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM
drive.
If your computer is configured for auto
start on the CD-ROM, proceed to step 4.
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" (
), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start"
button, click "Computer", and then
double-click the "CD-ROM" icon.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click
"My Computer", and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon.
3
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
In Windows Vista, if a message screen
appears asking you for confirmation, click
"Allow".
Note
Caution
Do not select "PS Printer Driver".
The PS printer driver for the
machine should only be installed
from the CD-ROM that accompanies
the network expansion kit.
Windows
2
Select the "PS Display Font" checkbox
and click the "Next" button.
If the language selection screen
appears after you double click the
"setup" icon, select the language that
you wish to use and click the "Next"
button. (Normally the correct language
is selected automatically.)
5
- 16 -
Follow the on-screen instructions.
USING THE PPD FILE
The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS driver of the operating system, and
can be used when the optional PS3 expansion kit is installed. Install the PPD file as needed.
Use the Add Printer Wizard in Windows to install the PPD file.
Be sure to read the Readme file before installing the PPD file. The Readme file is in the "EnglishA"
folder. For the location of the folder, see step 4.
1
Click "Add a printer" in "Printer Tasks".
• In Windows Vista, click "Add a printer"
from the tool bar.
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click
the "Add Printer" icon.
The "Add Printer Wizard" will appear.
4
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When you are asked to specify the path of
the PPD file, enter the path as follows.
(Substitute the letter of your CD-ROM
drive for "R" in the following paths.)
Operating system
Windows 98/Me
Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003/Vista
PPD file path
R:\Drivers\Printer
\EnglishA\PPD\9xMe
R:\Drivers\Printer
\EnglishA\PPD\2KXPVista
Installing the resident font information for PPD (only
when the PPD file is installed in Windows 98/Me)
If you have installed the PPD file in Windows 98/Me and will be using the resident font, you must install
resident font information for PPD. Follow the procedure below to install the resident fonts information.
Note
• If you are using Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 or Windows Vista, the
resident font information is automatically installed when the PPD file is installed.
• Before installing the resident font information, be sure to install the PPD file.
1
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2
Double-click "My Computer" ( ), and
then double-click the CD-ROM icon ( ).
5
After the resident font information has
been installed, restart your computer.
3
Double-click the "Drivers" folder, the
"Printer" folder, the "EnglishA" folder,
the "PPD" folder, the "9xMe" folder,
and "PFMSetup.exe".
Note
- 17 -
If printer resident fonts cannot be
specified from the application
software, the resident font information
has not been installed or the
information is not correct. In this case,
reinstall the resident font information.
Windows
2
3
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", click "Printers and Other Hardware",
and then click "Printers and Faxes".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button,
click "Control Panel" and then click
"Printer".
• In Windows Server 2003, click the
"Start" button and then click "Printers
and Faxes".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click
"Printers".
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER
After installing the printer driver, you must configure the printer driver settings appropriately for the
number of paper trays on the machine and the size of paper loaded in each tray.
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", click "Printers and Other
Hardware", and then click "Printers and
Faxes".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button,
click "Control Panel" and then click
"Printer".
• In Windows Server 2003, click the
"Start" button and then click "Printers
and Faxes".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click
"Printers".
2
Click the "SHARP XX-XXXX" printer
driver icon and select "Properties"
from the "File" menu.
• If you are using Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, go to step
4.
• In Windows Vista, from the "Organize"
menu select "Properties".
3
4
Click the "Configuration" tab and set
the printer configuration based on the
options that have been installed.
Set the printer configuration properly.
Otherwise, printing may not take place
correctly.
Windows
1
Note
5
Click the "Set Tray Status" button and
select the size of paper that is loaded in
each tray.
Select a tray in the "Paper source" menu,
and select the size of paper loaded in that
tray from the "Set Paper Size" menu.
Repeat for each tray.
6
Click the "OK" button in the "Set Tray
Status" window.
7
Click the "OK" button in the printer
properties window.
In Windows 98/Me, click the "Setup"
tab.
- 18 -
To automatically configure the settings
based on the detected machine
status, click the "Auto Configuration"
button.
SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT
This chapter explains how to install the PPD file to enable printing from a Macintosh and how to
configure the printer driver settings.
• MAC OS X: this page
(v10.1.5, v10.2.8, v10.3.9, v10.4 - v10.4.10)
• MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2: page 23
Note
To use the machine as a printer in a Macintosh environment, the PS3 expansion kit is necessary.
MAC OS X
Note
The explanations of screens and procedures are primarily for Mac OS X v10.4. The screens may
vary in other versions of the operating system.
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon (
the desktop.
3
Double-click the "MacOSX" folder.
Before installing the software, be sure to
read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in
the "US-English" folder in the "Readme"
folder.
4
Double-click the folder corresponding
to the versions of the operating
system.
5
) on
v10.1.5
v10.2.8
v10.3.9
v10.4 10.4.10
Double-click the "AR-NB2A" icon (
Note
6
- 19 -
).
• If the "Authorization" window
appears in Mac OS X v10.1.5, click
the lock icon ( ), enter the
password, and click the "OK" button.
• If the "Authenticate" window
appears in Mac OS X v10.2.8, enter
the password and click the "OK"
button.
Click the "Continue" button.
Macintosh
1
MAC OS X
7
Note
8
When the message "The software was
successfully installed" appears in the
installation window, click the "Close"
button.
This completes the installation of the
software. Next, configure the printer driver
settings.
If the license appears in the different
language, change the language in the
language menu.
11
Select "Utilities" from the "Go" menu.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5 or
v10.2.8, select "Applications" from the
"Go" menu.
12
Double-click the "Printer Setup Utility"
icon ( ).
If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5 or
v10.2.8, double-click the "Utilities" folder
and then double-click the "Print Center"
icon.
Select the hard drive where the PPD file
will be installed and click the
"Continue" button.
Be sure to select the hard drive on which
your operating system is installed.
Click the "Install" button.
Installation begins.
Note
13
Note
If the "Authenticate" window appears,
enter the password and click the "OK"
button.
- 20 -
If this is the first time you are installing
a printer driver on your computer, a
confirmation message will appear.
Click the "Add" button.
Click "Add".
If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5, click
the "Add Printer" button.
Macintosh
9
10
The License Agreement window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement
and then click the "Continue" button.
A message will appear asking you if you
agree to the terms of the license. Click the
"Agree" button.
MAC OS X
14
Configure the printer driver.
The procedure for configuring the printer driver varies depending on the operating system version. The
procedure for versions 10.4 - 10.4.10 and the procedure for other versions are explained separately below.
v10.4 - 10.4.10
10.1.5, v10.2.8, v10.3.9
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Select "AppleTalk".
If multiple AppleTalk zones are
displayed, select the zone that
includes the printer from the menu.
(3)
(4)
(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually
appears as "SCxxxxxx". ("xxxxxx" is a
sequence of characters that varies
depending on your model.)
(1) Click the "Default Browser" icon.
If multiple AppleTalk zones are
displayed, select the zone that
includes the printer from the menu.
(3) Select the PPD file of the machine.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5,
select "Other". The PPD file selection
window will appear. Click "Startup
disk name" - "Library" - "Printers" "PPDs" - "Contents" - "Resources" "en.lproj" - "PPD file for your model",
and then click the "Choose" button.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8,
select "Sharp" and click the PPD file
of your model.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9,
select "Auto Select".
(3) Make sure that the PPD file of your
model is selected.
(4) Click the "Add" button.
The PPD file of the machine is
automatically selected and the
peripheral devices installed on the
machine are detected and
automatically configured.
Note
(4) Click the "Add" button.
If you are using Mac OS X v10.3.9, the
PPD file of the machine is automatically
selected and the peripheral devices
installed on the machine are detected
and automatically configured.
The PPD file is installed in the following folders on the startup disk.
"Library" - "Printers" - "PPDs" - "Contents" - "Resources" - "en.lproj"
If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5, this completes the configuration of the printer driver. If you
are using a version other than Mac OS X v10.1.5, go to the next step.
- 21 -
Macintosh
(2) Click the machine's model name.
• The machine's model name usually
appears as "SCxxxxxx". ("xxxxxx" is
a sequence of characters that varies
depending on your model.)
• The PPD file of the machine is
automatically selected.
MAC OS X
15
Display printer information.
(2)
(1)
(1) Click the machine's name.
(2) Click "Show Info".
If you are using Mac OS X v10.2.8,
select "Show Info" from the "Printers"
menu.
16
Select the machine configuration.
If you selected "Auto Select" in (3) of step
14, the machine configuration is detected
and automatically configured. Check the
configured settings to make sure they are
correct.
(4)
(1)
Macintosh
(2)
(3)
(1) Select "Installable Options".
(2) Select the options that are installed
on the machine.
(3) Click the "Apply Changes" button.
(4) Click to close the window.
This completes the configuration of the
printer driver.
- 22 -
MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
Note
If you are using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, make sure that "LaserWriter 8" has been installed and that the
"LaserWriter 8" checkbox is selected
in "Extensions Manager" in "Control Panels". If not, install
it from the system CD-ROM supplied with your Macintosh computer.
1
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2)
into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
8
Select "Chooser" from the Apple Menu.
2
Double-click the "CD-ROM" icon (
on the desktop.
9
Create a printer.
3
Double-click the "MacOS" folder.
)
(1)
(2)
Before installing the software, be sure to
read "ReadMe First". "ReadMe First" is in
the "US-English" folder in the "Readme"
folder.
4
5
Double-click the "Installer" icon (
(3)
).
(1) Click the "LaserWriter 8" icon.
If multiple AppleTalk zones are
displayed, select the zone that
includes the printer.
Click the "Install" button.
(3) Click the "Create" button.
6
The License Agreement window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement
and then click the "Yes" button.
7
Read the message in the window that
appears and click the "Continue"
button.
Installation of the PPD file begins.
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your computer
will appear. Click the "OK" button and
restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the
software. Next, configure the printer driver
settings.
- 23 -
Macintosh
(2) Click the machine's model name.
The machine's model name usually
appears as "SCxxxxxx". ("xxxxxx" is a
sequence of characters that varies
depending on your model.)
MAC OS 9.0 - 9.2.2
10
13
Select the PPD file.
Select the machine configuration.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1) Select the options that are installed
on the machine.
(2) Click the "OK" button.
(1) Click the PPD file for your model.
(2) Click the "Select" button.
Note
• If the above dialog box does not
appear and you return to the
"Chooser" dialog box, follow these
steps to select the PPD file
manually.
(1) Make sure that the machine is
selected in the "Select a
PostScript Printer" list, and then
click the "Setup" button followed
by the "Select PPD" button.
(2) Select the PPD file for your
model and click the "Open"
button.
(3) Click the "OK" button.
• The PPD file is installed in the
"Printer Descriptions" folder in the
"Extensions" folder.
14
Click the "OK" button in the window of
step 12 to close the window.
15
Click the close box (
"Chooser".
This completes the configuration of the
printer driver.
Make sure that the machine is selected
in the "Select a PostScript Printer" list
and then click the "Setup" button.
12
Click the "Configure" button.
Note
To automatically configure the settings
based on the installed machine
options that are detected, click the
"Auto Setup" button.
- 24 -
If you experience problems that may
be due to the installed screen fonts,
immediately delete the installed fonts
from the system.
Macintosh
Installing the screen fonts
The screen fonts for Mac OS 9.0 - 9.2.2 are
contained in the "Font" folder of the "PRINTER
UTILITIES" CD-ROM that accompanies the
PS3 expansion kit. Copy the fonts that you wish
to install to the "System Folder" of the startup
disk.
Note
11
) to close the
AR-NB2 A
MODEL
AR-NB2 A
NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
OPERATION MANUAL
(for network scanner)
Page
2
• INTRODUCTION
• BEFORE USING THE NETWORK
4
SCANNER FUNCTION
• USING THE NETWORK
17
SCANNER FUNCTION
21
• TROUBLESHOOTING
• SHARPDESK CD-ROM
(for Windows)
• SPECIFICATIONS
25
29
INTRODUCTION
The optional network expansion kit (AR-NB2 A) enables the machine to be used as a network scanner.
● This manual only explains features that can be used when the optional network expansion kit is installed. For
information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral devices,
and other copier-related information, please refer to your operation manual for the machine.
For information on the printer function that can be used when the network expansion kit is installed, see the online
manual for the network printer that accompanies the network expansion kit.
● The explanations in this manual assume that the person who will install the product and the users of the product
have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows.
● This manual refers to the digital multifunctional system AR-208S/208D as "the machine".
● For information on the operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
● The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are for Windows XP. The screens may vary
depending on your Windows version and settings.
● This manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".
● Where "XX-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model.
Warranty
While every effort has been made to make this operation manual as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP
Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to
change without notice. SHARP is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related
to the use of this operation manual.
Trademark Acknowledgments
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Vista® and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
-2-
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................... 2
1
4
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
SHARPDESK CD-ROM (for Windows)
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION.... 4
SOFTWARE PROGRAMS...............................25
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED
FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE .. 5
● SHARPDESK (Desktop Document
Management Software)................................. 25
● NETWORK SCANNER TOOL ...................... 25
● SHARP TWAIN AR/DM................................. 25
● HOW TO ACCESS THE WEB PAGE AND
VIEW HELP .....................................................5
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR USERS)......... 6
● STORING SCANNING SETTINGS..................7
● STORING DESTINATIONS .............................8
USER'S GUIDES FOR SOFTWARE
PROGRAMS ....................................................26
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM ..27
● INSTALLING SHARPDESK AND NETWORK
SCANNER TOOL.......................................... 27
● INSTALLING SHARP TWAIN AR/DM........... 28
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR THE
ADMINISTRATOR) ......................................... 13
● BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK
SCANNING ....................................................14
● VARIOUS SERVER SETTINGS ....................15
● PROTECTING INFORMATION
PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE
([Passwords]) .................................................16
2
UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM..28
● UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM
FROM THE CONTROL PANEL .................... 28
5
USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE......... 17
● TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO
E-MAIL ...........................................................18
● IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD
ORIGINAL LOADING ORIENTATION ...........20
● HOW TO ENTER CHARACTERS .................20
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 21
● DISPLAY MESSAGES...................................22
● IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED ..................22
● IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO
E-MAIL ...........................................................23
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS ...................... 24
● HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK
EXPANSION KIT ...........................................24
-3-
SPECIFICATIONS
1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION
ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER
FUNCTION
When the network expansion kit is installed in the machine, a document or photo can be scanned into an image file
and sent over a network or the Internet to a file server, e-mail destination, or your own computer.
You can select from the following transmission methods as the destination where you wish to send the scanned
image, depending on where you wish to send the scanned image data.
1. The scanned image can be sent to a memory
storage device on a network (a designated
directory on an FTP server). (This is called
"Scan to FTP" in this manual.)
When sending a scanned image to an FTP
server, an e-mail message can also be sent to a
preset e-mail address to inform the recipient of
the location of the scanned image data. (This is
called "Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)" in this
manual.)
2. A scanned image can be sent to a computer
connected to the same network as the
machine. (This is called "Scan to Desktop" in
this manual.)
* Before Scan to Desktop can be performed, the
software in the CD-ROM that accompanies the
network expansion kit (AR-NB2 A) must be
installed. For the procedure for installing the
software, see the "SHARPDESK CD-ROM (for
Windows)" (p.25).
3. The scanned image can be sent to an e-mail
recipient. (This is called "Scan to E-mail" in
this manual.)
-4-
1
SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING
REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK
SCANNER FEATURE
To use the Network Scanner feature, settings for the SMTP server, DNS server, and destination addresses must be
configured.
To configure the settings, use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the
machine's Web server. The Web page can be viewed with your Web browser (Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
(Windows), or Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later).
HOW TO ACCESS THE WEB PAGE AND VIEW HELP
Use the following procedure to access the Web pages. [Help] can be clicked at the bottom of the menu frame to view
information on the various function settings that can be operated remotely over the network from the machine's Web
pages. For the settings of each function, see the explanations in Help.
1
3
Open the Web browser on your
computer.
Supported browsers:
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Windows)
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later
2
Click [Help] under the menu frame.
For an explanation of a
function or setting in the
Web page, click the
corresponding item in the
Help screen.
In the "Address" field of your Web
browser, enter the IP address of the
machine.
To check the IP address,
see "CHECKING THE IP
ADDRESS" (p.24).
4
Close the Web page.
When you have finished
using the Web page, click
the (close) button in
the top right corner of the
page.
When the connection is complete, the Web page will
appear in your Web browser.
☞"ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR USERS)" (p.6)
-5-
1
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR USERS)
When you successfully connect to the Web server in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the
right frame that allows you to establish settings for that item.
For detailed explanations of the procedures for configuring settings, click [Help] in the menu frame.
(1)
(2)
(3)
1
(4)
(1) Menu frame
The various settings appear in this frame. Click a
menu item to configure the corresponding setting.
(2) System Information
This shows the model name and current status of
the machine.
• Device Status
This shows information on the machine's paper
trays and output trays, toner and other supplies,
and the total sheet usage count.
Out of paper and other warnings appear in red.
• Device Configuration
Shows what options are installed.
• Network Status
Shows general information as well as the status
of TCP/IP, NetWare, AppleTalk, and NetBEUI.
(3) Scan Management
This is the base screen for storing, editing, and
deleting destination information.
• Destination (p.8)
Store destinations for Scan to FTP, Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink), Scan to Desktop, and Scan to
E-mail. You can also edit or delete previously
stored destination information.
• Network Scanning
This section explains how to edit the scan mode
and custom indexes.
- Scan Mode
Scanning settings appropriate for the use can
be stored.
☞"STORING SCANNING SETTINGS" (p.7)
- Custom Index
This enables to change custom index names.
Click the [Submit] button to store the entered
information as index names.
The custom index consists of six indexes. A
6-character index name can be stored for each
index, allowing destinations to be grouped.
(4) Admin Mode
Click here to open the adminstrator Web page and
enter the administrator user name and password.
☞"PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN
THE WEB PAGE ([Passwords])" (p.16)
☞"ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR THE
ADMINISTRATOR)" (p.13)
-6-
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
STORING SCANNING SETTINGS
Sets of scan settings (color mode, resolution, file type, etc.) can be stored for use in various scanning applications. Each set
of settings is called a "Scan Mode". When storing a destination, you can select one of the stored scanned modes. The
settings of the selected scan mode will be used when you scan an image and send it to that destination (p.8 to 11).
1
Click "Network Scanning" in the menu
frame of the Web page.
2
Click "Add" below the scan list.
3
Select the desired scanning settings.
Refer to the following table for information on
each setting.
1
If you need to change the
settings in a previously
stored scan mode, select
the scan mode and click
"Edit". To delete a scan
mode, select the scan
mode and click "Delete".
4
When you have finished selecting the
settings, click "Submit".
The selected settings are stored.
Scan Mode settings
Item
Description
Default setting
Name
Enter a name for the scan mode (up to 32 characters).
—
Color Mode
Select Full Color, Grayscale, or Mono 2 gradation for the color mode.
Full Color
Resolution
Select the resolution.
75 dpi
Void Area
Select "On" to not scan the 4 mm around the edges of the image and
instead attach a white border.
Off
Light Source
When "Mono 2 gradation" is selected for "Color Mode", select "Red",
"Green", or "Blue" for the light source.
Green
File Type
Select "JPG", "PDF", or "TIFF" for the file type of the scanned image.
TIFF
Compression Mode
Select "None", "MH (G3)", or "MMR (G4)" for the compression mode of
the scanned image.
None
Pages Per File
Select the number of pages per image file.
ALL
If you wish to use this scan mode as the default scan mode when storing
destinations, select the "Default Scan Mode" checkbox.
Default Scan Mode
The "Default Scan Mode" is also used for Scan to E-mail when the e-mail
address is directly entered or selected from an LDAP server.
Note
Not selected
• For normal text originals, a sufficiently legible image is produced when the color mode is set to "Mono 2
gradation" and the resolution is 200 dpi or 300 dpi.
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as a
photograph or an illustration. Note that a high resolution setting will result in a larger file size, and transmission
may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the image is sent (or if the
administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful, you can try such
measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size setting for the original.
• To open the scanned image without using the software program in the CD-ROM that accompanies the network
expansion kit, the recipient must have a viewer program that can open the image format (file type) that was
selected as explained above.
• The factory default setting for the image format produces the smallest file (File Type: TIFF, Compression Mode:
MMR (G4)). If the recipient cannot open the image, try sending the image in a different format.
• If the number of scanned originals is not divisible by the number set in "Pages Per File", the last file will have less pages.
• The scan settings stored in a scan mode cannot be edited or deleted if the scan mode has been selected for a destination.
-7-
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
STORING DESTINATIONS
To store scanning destinations, click [Destination] in the Web page menu frame. This screen can also be used to
edit or delete stored destinations. (p.12)
A total of 200 destinations* can be stored, including E-mail, FTP, Desktop, and Group destinations.
* Multiple e-mail addresses can be stored as a group (up to 100). Note that this may reduce the maximum number
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.
E-mail:
FTP:
Desktop:
Group (E-mail):
See below
See page 9.
See page 10.
See page 11.
1
Storing destinations for Scan to E-mail
1
3
Click [Destination] in the menu frame
of the Web page.
Enter the destination information.
For each setting, see the following table.
2
Click [E-mail].
4
When you have finished entering the
information, click [Submit].
The entries will be stored.
To perform Scan to E-mail, the SMTP server settings must first be established. (p.15))
Note
E-mail destination information
Item
Description
Name (Required)
Enter the name of the destination (up to 36 characters).
Initial (Optional)
Enter initial text for the destination (maximum of 10 characters). When the destination
list is displayed in the destination control screen, the initial text is used to group the
destinations.
Custom Index
Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired (p.6)), allowing convenient
grouping of destinations. Select a custom index for the destination to be stored.
E-mail Address
(Required)
Enter the e-mail address of the destination (up to 64 characters). If an LDAP server is
being used, you can click the [Global Address Search] button to search for an
address on the LDAP server.
Scan Mode
Select the name of the scan mode that you wish to use for the destination. The scan
mode must be previously stored (p.7).
-8-
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing destinations for Scan to FTP
1
3
Click [Destination] in the menu frame
of the Web page.
Enter the destination information.
For the settings, see the following table.
2
Click [FTP].
1
4
When you have completed all the
entries, click [Submit].
The entries will be stored.
• If you select the "Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e-mailed" checkbox and select a previously stored recipient (p.8)
from "E-mail Destination", an e-mail will be sent to the recipient informing them of the file format and location of the
scanned image data (Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)). A hyperlink to the file server to which the scanned image data was sent
appears in the e-mail, and the recipient can click the hyperlink to go directly to the location where the image data is stored.
• Use "Scan Mode" to select a set of previously stored scanning settings (see "STORING SCANNING
SETTINGS" (p.7)). The list shows the names of the stored scan modes.
Note
FTP destination information
Item
Description
Name (Required)
Enter the name of the destination (up to 36 characters).
Initial (Optional)
Enter initial text for the destination (maximum of 10 characters). When the destination list is
displayed in the destination control screen, the initial text is used to group the destinations.
Custom Index
Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired (p.6), allowing convenient
grouping of destinations. Select a custom index for the destination to be stored.
Hostname or IP Address
(required)*1
Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server (maximum of 127 characters).
User Name (Optional)
Enter the login user name for the FTP server (maximum of 32 characters).
Password (Optional)
Enter the login password for the FTP server (maximum of 32 characters).
Directory (Optional)
If you wish to specify a destination directory on the FTP server, enter the directory
(maximum of 200 characters).
Enable Hyperlink to FTP
server to be e-mailed
(Checkbox)*2
When you send a scanned file to an FTP server, you can have a transmission
notification automatically sent to the file recipient by e-mail. To have transmission
notifications sent, select the checkbox. The FTP server name will appear in the
transmission notification as a hyperlink.
E-mail Destination
Select the recipient that you wish to notify of the file transmission to the FTP server. To select
a recipient here, the recipient's e-mail address must have been previously stored. (p.8)
Scan Mode
Select the name of the scan mode that you wish to use for the destination. The scan
mode must be previously stored (p.7).
*1 If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server settings. (p.15)
*2 To perform Scan to FTP (Hyperlink), you must also enter the settings for the e-mail server.
-9-
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing destinations for Scan to Desktop
The destination for Scan to Desktop is stored by the Sharp Network Scanner Tool Setup Wizard when "Network Scanner
Tool" is installed in your computer. For this reason, there is no need to store the Scan to Desktop destination in the Web
page. (The Network Scanner Tool is on the "Sharpdesk" CD-ROM that accompanies the Network Expansion Kit.)
For information on Scan to Desktop system requirements, installing the Network Scanner Tool, and storing the
destination, see the "SHARPDESK CD-ROM (for Windows)" (p.25).
Normally your computer is stored as the destination by the method indicated above.
The following page for storing Scan to Desktop destination information appears when [Destination] is selected in the
menu frame, followed by [Desktop]. This page is used mainly by the system administrator in the following circumstance.
• When another machine that also has the network expansion kit is added to your network and you wish to send an
image scanned on the new machine to a destination stored on the existing machine.
See "Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations" (p.12) to select the Scan to Desktop destination
information that you wish to use on the new machine and enter the displayed information in this screen in the new
machine. (When you have completed all entries, click [Submit].)
If there are several destinations that you wish to use on the new machine, repeat this procedure as needed.
If the information entered here differs from the information entered on the host computer, transmission/reception will
not be possible.
For the settings, see the following table.
Scan to Desktop destination information
Item
Description
Name (Required)
Enter the name of the destination (up to 36 characters).
Initial (Optional)
Enter initial text for the destination (maximum of 10 characters). When the destination list is
displayed in the destination control screen, the initial text is used to group the destinations.
Custom Index
Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired (p.6), allowing convenient
grouping of destinations. Select a custom index for the destination to be stored.
Hostname or IP Address
(Required)*
Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server (maximum of 127 characters).
Port Number (Required)
Enter a port number from 0 to 65535 for the desktop network scanner tool.
Process Directory
(Optional)
Enter the destination directory name for the file (maximum of 200 characters). The file
will be processed in this directory after it is received.
User Name (Optional)
Enter the login user name for the network scanner tool (maximum of 32 characters).
Password (Optional)
Enter the login password for the network scanner tool (maximum of 32 characters).
Scan Mode
Select the name of the scan mode that you wish to use for the destination. The scan
mode must be previously stored (p.7).
* If you entered a host name in "Hostname or IP Address", you will need to enter the DNS server settings. (p.15)
- 10 -
1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Storing Groups (Scan to E-mail)
You can send a scanned image to multiple e-mail destinations in a single Scan to E-mail operation. If you frequently
transmit to a fixed group of destinations, you can store the destinations as a group.
Up to 100 destinations can be stored in one group.
Note
1
Click [Destination] in the menu frame
of the Web page.
3
Enter the destination information.
For the settings, see the following table.
1
2
Click [Group].
4
When you have completed all of the
entries, click "Submit".
The entries will be stored.
Storing a group of destinations
Item
Description
Name (Required)
Enter the name of the destination (up to 36 characters).
Initial (Optional)
Enter initial text for the destinations (maximum of 10 characters). When the
destination list is displayed in the destination control screen, the initial text is used to
group the destinations.
Custom Index
Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired (p.6), allowing convenient
grouping of destinations. Select a custom index for the destination to be stored.
Address(es) (Required)
Select the address of each destination from the "E-mail" list box. Programmed e-mail
destinations appear in each of the destination lists. To select multiple destinations,
click each address while holding down the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard. If you need to
cancel an address that has been selected, click the address again while holding down
the [Ctrl] key.
If an LDAP server is being used, you can click the [Global Address Search] button to
search for an address on the LDAP server. Multiple e-mail addresses can be entered.
Separate the e-mail addresses with a comma (,), semi-colon (;), space ( ), or colon (:).
Scan Mode
Select the name of the scan mode that you wish to use for the destination. The scan
mode must be previously stored (p.7).
- 11 -
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations
To edit or delete programmed destinations, click [Destination] in the menu frame of the Web page.
1
2
Click [Destination] in the menu frame
of the Web page.
3
To edit the selected destination, click [Edit]
at the bottom of the Destinations List.
The programming screen
of the destination
selected in step 2
appears. Edit the
information in the same
way as you initially stored
it.
When finished, be sure to click [Submit] to save
your changes.
In the Destinations List, click the
checkbox of the destination that you
want to edit or delete.
4
To delete the selected destination,
click [Delete] at the bottom of the
Destinations List.
A message appears
asking you to confirm the
deletion. Click [Yes] to
delete.
Note
If you attempt to delete a programmed destination in the following situations, a warning message will appear and
deletion will not be possible.
• The destination is included in a group.
If the destination is being used for a current transmission, cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and
then delete the destination. If the destination is included in a group, delete the destination from the group and
then delete the destination.
Printing lists of programmed destinations
You can print lists showing the destinations that have been programmed.
The following lists can be printed.
• Print individual list: Shows the information programmed in e-mail, FTP, desktop, and group destinations.
• Print group list: Shows only the information programmed in group (e-mail) destinations.
1
Click [Destination] in the menu frame
of the Web page.
2
To print the individual list, click [Print
Individual List] at the bottom of the
destinations list.
3
- 12 -
To print the group list, click [Print
Group List] at the bottom of the
destinations list.
1
ABOUT THE WEB PAGE (FOR THE
ADMINISTRATOR)
In addition to the menu that appear in the user Web page, the Web page for the administrator also shows menus
that can only be established by the administrator.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the
right frame that allows you to configure settings for that item.
Settings that can only be configured by the administrator are explained here.
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(4) Quick Setup (p.15)
This is used to configure basic settings for the
SMTP, DNS, and LDAP servers.
(1) Network Scanning (p.14)
This lets you select transmission methods for the
network scanner function and configure settings
for Scan to E-mail.
(2) Passwords (p.16)
The administrator can establish passwords to
protect the Web site. Enter the password that you
wish to establish and click the [Submit] button.
A password can be set for the administrator and
users.
(3) Clock Adjust
This is used to set the time in the machine. Make
sure the time is set correctly when performing
Scan to E-mail.
This setting does not appear on models that have
the fax function. If your model has the fax function,
see the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" to set
the time at the operation panel of the machine.
(5) Security
Port numbers can be changed or disabled for
security purposes.
Note
If "HTTP" is disabled, it will not be possible
to open the Web page. To open the Web
page in this case, the network expansion kit
must be reset.
☞"HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK
EXPANSION KIT" (p.24)
(6) Services (p.15)
This is used to configure advanced SMTP and
DNS server settings as needed for each
transmission method.
(7) LDAP (p.15)
This is used to configure advanced settings for
global address searches.
- 13 -
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING
Click [Network Scanning] in the menu frame and configure the required settings. A password is required to access
this screen. (p.16) These settings should only be configured by the network administrator. For explanations of each
of the items, click [Help] in the menu frame.
1
Click [Network Scanning] in the menu
frame.
4
The Network Scanning
setup page appears.
2
To prevent the transmission of excessively large
files by Scan to E-mail, you can set a size limit.
If the image file created from the scanned image
is larger than the set limit, the image file is
discarded. The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10
MB in increments of 1 MB.
The factory default setting is [Unlimited]. If you
wish to set a limit, remove the checkmark from
the [Unlimited] checkbox and enter the desired
limit.
Select the transmission methods that
you wish to use.
Select the scanner delivery methods that you
want to use. In the "Enable Scanner Delivery to:"
field, click the checkbox next to each method that
you want to use so that a checkmark appears in
the checkbox.
All transmission methods are initially selected
(factory default settings).
Set a limit for the size of image files.
5
Select the method for assigning a file
name to a scanned image.
Select the method for assigning a file name to a
scanned image. In "File Naming", click the items
that you wish to use in the file name. "Destination
Name" and "Date & Time" are initially selected.
Note
6
3
If you are going to send images to the same
recipient more than once, we recommend
that you also select "Session Page Counter"
or "Unique Identifier" to prevent sending
multiple files with the same name, which
would result in each successive file
overwriting the previous file.
Selecting an e-mail subject (only used
for Scan to E-mail).
The setting is used to enter the subject that
appears in the recipient's e-mail program when
you perform Scan to E-mail. (This setting is not
necessary if you will not be using Scan to E-mail.)
Enter a subject (maximum of 80 characters). If
nothing is entered, "Scanned image from <Device
Name>*" will appear.
Configure the Advanced Setup
settings.
Select advanced functions that can be used for
Scan to E-mail.
If you wish to BCC a copy of a Scan to E-mail
transmission to an e-mail address, select the
[Bcc] checkbox and enter the e-mail address.
* The name that appears in Device Name is the name
stored in "Name" in the screen that appears when
you click [System Information] in the menu frame. If a
name has not been stored, the product name will
appear.
7
Click [Submit].
After entering the
settings, be sure to click
[Submit] to store them.
- 14 -
1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
VARIOUS SERVER SETTINGS
The procedures for using [Quick Setup] are explained here. [Quick Setup] is used to quickly configure only the
required settings for "SMTP", "DNS", and "LDAP" servers. These settings are normally configured first.
SMTP server: SMTP is used to transmit e-mail that is sent using Scan to E-mail or Scan to FTP (Hyperlink). To use
these transmission methods, your SMTP server settings must be configured.
DNS server: If you entered a host name in "Primary SMTP Server" or "Secondary SMTP Server" of "SMTP", you
must also configure your DNS server settings.
You will also need to configure your DNS server settings if host names will be entered in "Hostname
or IP Address" when storing destinations for Scan to FTP (Scan to FTP (Hyperlink)) or Scan to
Desktop.
LDAP server: If mail addresses are managed on your network by an LDAP server, the e-mail addresses stored in
the LDAP server can be used for Scan to E-mail.
To allow the machine to use the e-mail addresses in the LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must
be configured in the Web page.
Configuring SMTP, DNS and LDAP server settings.
1
Click [Quick Setup] in the menu frame.
3
When you have completed all of the
entries, click [Submit].
The entries will be stored.
2
Enter the required information in
"SMTP", "DNS" and "LDAP".
For explanations of each setting, click [Help] in
the upper right-hand corner of the window.
Note
If you need to configure advanced settings for the SMTP, DNS, and LDAP servers, follow the procedures below.
• Configuring SMTP and DNS server settings
Click [Services] in the menu frame to display the services setup screen. Select the desired server and then
configure the required parameters for that server.
• Configuring LDAP server settings
Click [LDAP] in the menu frame to display the LDAP setup screen. Configure the required parameters.
- 15 -
1
BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE
WEB PAGE ([Passwords])
The settings and information programmed in the Web page can be protected by establishing passwords (click
[Passwords] in the menu frame). The administrator must change the factory default password to a new password.
The administrator should also take care to remember the new password. From now on, the new password must be
entered each time you wish to configure settings in the Web pages.
A password can be set for the administrator and users.
1
Click [Passwords] in the menu frame.
3
Enter passwords in "User Password"
and "Admin Password".
• A maximum of 7 characters and/or numbers
can be entered for each password (passwords
are case sensitive).
• Be sure to enter the same password in
"Confirm Password" as you did in "New
Password".
2
Enter the current password in "Admin
Password".
4
The entered password is stored.
After setting the password, turn the machine
power off and then back on.
When establishing a password for the first time,
enter "Sharp" in "Admin Password".
Caution
Be sure to enter "S" in upper case
and "harp" in lower case (passwords
are case sensitive).
When you have completed all entries,
click [Submit].
When prompted to enter the password, a user
should enter "user" in "User Name" and an
administrator should enter "admin" in "User Name".
The appropriate password should be entered in
"Password". For more information, click [Help] in the
upper right-hand corner of the window.
- 16 -
1
2
USING THE NETWORK
SCANNER FUNCTION
This section explains the procedure for scanning from the machine after the network scanner settings have been
configured in the Web page.
For the operation panel and the parts of the machine that are used for network scanning, see the operation manual
for the machine.
BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE
1
4
Press the [MODE SELECT] key to
select scanner mode.
The "SCAN" indicator
lights up to indicate that
scanner mode is
selected.
2
ADDRESS SEARCH
S
Place the original in the document
feeder tray or on the document glass.
For information on how to place the original, see
"IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD
ORIGINAL LOADING ORIENTATION" (p.20).
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select "ADDRESS SEARCH"
and then press the [ENTER] key.
SCAN USING:
ADDRESS SEARCH
Note
Caution
Enter search characters and press the
[ENTER] key.
The selections change as
follows each time the [ ]
key (
) is pressed:
"INPUT ADDRESS" →
"GLOBAL ADDRESS" →
"ADDRESS SEARCH".
If you continue to press the
[ ] key (
), the stored
destinations will appear in
alphabetical order based
on the initial stored for
each destination.
You will search the
names that were entered
for the destinations.
Destinations matching
the search characters will
appear.
To enter characters, see
"HOW TO ENTER
CHARACTERS" (p.20).
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the destination and then
press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the original size and
then press the [ENTER] key.
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
8.5X11
7
The original size changes
as follows each time the
[ ] key (
) or [ ]
key (
) is pressed:
"8.5x11"→"8.5x5.5"
→"A4"→"B5"→"A5"
→"8.5x14"→"8.5x13".
Press the [START] key (
scanning.
) to begin
• The [CLEAR] key (
) can be pressed during a scanning operation to return to the previous step of the operation.
To cancel a scanning operation and return to the initial state of scanner mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
• The network scanner function cannot scan both sides of an original placed in the RSPF.
• The scan settings stored in a scan mode cannot be edited if the scan mode has been selected for a
destination. You can either store the desired settings in a new scan mode as explained in "STORING
SCANNING SETTINGS" (p.7) and then edit the destination settings, or you can cancel the selection of the
scan mode for the destination and then edit the scan mode settings.
• Before performing Scan to E-mail, read "IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO
E-MAIL" (p.23). Take care that the image file is not too large.
• A limit for the size of image files that can be sent using Scan to E-mail can be set in
"Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments" (p.14) of the Web page.
- 17 -
2
USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
TRANSMISSION METHODS FOR SCAN TO E-MAIL
The e-mail address for a Scan to E-mail transmission can be entered manually or selected from e-mail addresses
stored on an LDAP server.
Sending an image by entering an e-mail address manually
1
4
Press the [MODE SELECT] key to
select scanner mode.
The "SCAN" indicator
lights up to indicate that
scanner mode is
selected.
Enter the destination e-mail address
and press the [ENTER] key.
INPUT ADDRESS
XXX@XX.XXX.com
To enter characters, see
"HOW TO ENTER
CHARACTERS" (p.20).
2
2
Place the original in the document
feeder tray or on the document glass.
5
For information on how to place the original, see
"IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD
ORIGINAL LOADING ORIENTATION" (p.20).
3
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
8.5X11
Select "INPUT ADDRESS" and press
the [ENTER] key.
SCAN USING:
INPUT ADDRESS
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the original size and
then press the [ENTER] key.
If "INPUT ADDRESS"
does not appear, make
sure that "Scan to ad-hoc
E-mail" is enabled in the
Web page (p.14).
6
Press the [START] key (
scanning.
Note
- 18 -
The original size
changes as follows each
time the [ ] key (
)
or [ ] key (
) is
pressed:
"8.5x11"→"8.5x5.5"
→"A4"→"B5"→"A5"
→"8.5x14"→"8.5x13".
) to begin
The original is scanned using the settings of
the scan mode that has the "Default Scan
Mode" checkbox selected.
USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
Sending an image by selecting an e-mail address in an LDAP server
To use an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page.
1
Press the [MODE SELECT] key to
select scanner mode.
The "SCAN" indicator
lights up to indicate that
scanner mode is
selected.
2
5
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the destination and then
press the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select the original size, and
then press the [ENTER] key.
ORIG. SIZE ENTER
8.5X11
Place the original in the document
feeder tray or on the document glass.
For information on how to place the original, see
"IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD
ORIGINAL LOADING ORIENTATION" (p.20).
3
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key
( ) to select "GLOBAL ADDRESS"
and then press the [ENTER] key.
7
Press the [START] key (
scanning.
Note
SCAN USING:
GLOBAL ADDRESS
4
Enter search characters and press the
[ENTER] key.
GLOBAL ADD. SEARCH
S
Note
Destinations matching
the search characters will
appear.
To enter characters, see
"HOW TO ENTER
CHARACTERS" (p.20).
If you do not know the exact name, you can
enter " " for characters that you do not
know to conduct a wildcard search.
- 19 -
The original size
changes as follows each
time the [ ] key (
)
or [ ] key (
) is
pressed:
"8.5x11"→"8.5x5.5"
→"A4"→"B5"→"A5"
→"8.5x14"→"8.5x13".
) to begin
The original is scanned using the settings of
the scan mode that has the "Default Scan
Mode" checkbox selected.
2
USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD ORIGINAL
LOADING ORIENTATION
When using the document glass, the original should be placed face down. Center the original vertically on the
document glass with the top edge at the left edge of the glass.
When using the RSPF, the original should be placed face up in the middle of the document feeder tray, with the top of
the original to the right. (The network scanner function cannot scan both sides of an original placed in the RSPF.)
Document glass
RSPF
Scanning result
Long horizontal originals (from 8-1/2" to 14") can only be placed as shown below.
For this reason, the scanned image will be rotated 90° when viewed on a computer.
Document glass
RSPF
Scanning result
HOW TO ENTER CHARACTERS
You can enter letters with the numeric keys. Letters are marked above each of numeric keys [2] through [9]. To enter
a letter, press the appropriate key repeatedly until the desired letter appears (the number of the key appears first,
followed by letters in the order marked above the key). The keys used for entering characters are shown below.
The following characters can be entered with the numeric keys:
Characters that can be entered
key
When entering e-mail address When entering search characters
1 1
1 Space
2 a b c 2 A B C
A B C 2 a b c
3 d e f
3 D E F
D E F 3 d e f
4 g h i
4 G H I
G H I
4 g h i
5 j
k I
5 J K L
J K L 5 j
k l
6 m n o 6 M N O
M N O 6 m n o
7 p q r s 7 P Q R S P Q R S 7 p q r s
8 t
u v 8 T U V
T U V 8 t
u v
9 w x y z 9 W X Y Z W X Y Z 9 w x y z
_-.@
*} {][?>=;:,+)('&%$"!/_-.@#
0 0
0
# @.-_
#@.-_/!"$%&'()+,:;=>?[]{}*
● To enter two characters in succession which require using the same key, press the [ ] key (
) once after
entering the first character and then enter the second character.
● If you enter an incorrect character or number, follow these steps to correct the mistake.
1. Press the [ ] key (
) or [ ] key (
) to move the cursor to the character immediately following the
incorrect character.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key (
).
The character in front of the cursor is deleted.
3. Enter the correct character.
The character is inserted in front of the cursor.
- 20 -
2
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a problem or question arises, try to solve the situation using the following information before contacting your
authorized SHARP dealer.
Image transmission problems are explained here. For image scanning problems, see the operation manual for the machine.
Problem
Cause and solution
The selected "Scan Size" setting is smaller than the actual original size.
The scanned image is clipped.
→ Set the scan size to the actual original size (p.17) and make sure that the
original is placed in the correct orientation (p.20).
If you intentionally selected a size setting smaller than the actual original size,
take into consideration the part of the original that you wish to scan when
placing the original. For example, if the actual size is 8-1/2" x 11" and you
selected 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" for the size setting, place the original so that the part
that you wish to scan is within the 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" area at the left, center of the
glass.
The viewer program used by the recipient does not support the
format of the received image data.
The received image data cannot be
opened.
When the same file name is used for two
successive Scan to FTP transmissions,
the second file is not sent.
→ Try selecting a different file type (TIFF / PDF / JPEG) and/or a different
compression format (None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)) when sending the image
data.
Otherwise, have the recipient use Sharpdesk or a viewer program that supports
the above combinations of file types and compression formats.
The first file may still remain in the cache of the file server client. Disable
use of the cache in the client software.
There is a mistake in the stored destination information or the wrong
destination was selected.
The recipient does not receive
transmitted data.
→ Make sure that the correct destination information is stored. If there is a
mistake, correct it (p.12).
* If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail) is unsuccessful, an error message such
as "Undelivered Message" may be sent to the designated administrator's
e-mail address. This information may help you determine the cause of the
problem.
Check the Web page to see if a limit has been set for the size of image
files sent using Scan to E-mail (the factory default setting is "Unlimited").
A limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB. Consult the administrator of the
Web page to select a suitable limit (p.14).
The recipient does not receive data
sent by e-mail (Scan to E-mail).
Transmission takes a long time.
The amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail transmission is
sometimes limited by the administrator of the mail server. Even if the
amount of data sent is within the limit setting explained above, if it exceeds
the limit set by the administrator of the mail server, the data will not be
delivered to the recipient.
Decrease the amount of data sent in the e-mail transmission (reduce the
number of pages scanned). (Ask your mail server administrator what the
data limit is for one e-mail transmission.)
When there is a large amount of image information, the data file is also
large and transmission takes a long time.
- 21 -
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Caution
Pay attention to the following points when selecting scan settings to ensure that an image file
is created that suits the purpose of transmission in terms of image quality and file size.
Scan settings are configured in the Web page.
• Color mode
Select a color mode that is appropriate for the use of the document to be scanned so that the file size will not
be larger than necessary.
Scanning a document with the color mode set to gray scale or black and white will yield a smaller file size than
scanning in color.
• Resolution
For normal text originals, a sufficiently legible image is produced when the color mode is set to "Mono 2
gradation" and the resolution is 200 dpi or 300 dpi.
The 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high-clarity image reproduction is required, such as an
original that includes photographs or illustrations. Note that a high-resolution setting will result in a larger file
size and transmission may not be successful if there is insufficient disk capacity in the server to which the
image is sent (or if the administrator of the server has restricted the file size). If transmission is not successful,
you can try such measures as reducing the number of scanned pages in the file or reducing the scan size
setting for the original.
3
DISPLAY MESSAGES
If a transmission error occurs when you send a scanned image, a message informing you of the error and an error
code will appear in the operation panel on the machine.
Error Code
Solution
Page
CE-00
CE-01
Turn off the power and turn it back on. Consult with your network administrator to make
sure that no problems exist on the network or in the server. If the error is not cleared after
turning the power off and on, turn off the power and contact your dealer.
—
CE-02
CE-04
Server access denied.
The scanned image was not sent because a connection to the server could not be established.
Make sure that the SMTP server settings or FTP server settings in the Web page are correct.
The procedure for configuring the SMTP server is explained in "VARIOUS SERVER
SETTINGS", and the procedure for editing Scan to FTP destination information is
explained in "Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations".
12, 15
CE-03
The scanned image was not sent because the server was busy or there was too much
traffic. Wait briefly and then try again.
—
CE-05
The scanned image was not sent because the directory of the destination FTP server was not
correct. Make sure that the correct FTP server information is configured in the Web page.
12
CE-09
The size of the scanned image file exceeds the upper limit set in "Maximum Size of File"
in the Web page. Reduce the number of original pages scanned into the file, or change
the upper limit set in "Maximum Size of File".
14
CE-12
The maximum number of destinations that can be searched has been exceeded.
Increase the number of search characters to narrow the range of the LDAP search.
19
MEMORY
FULL
The memory became full during scanning. Scan less pages, lower the resolution, or
change the color mode so that the file size is smaller, and try scanning again.
For the scan mode settings, see "STORING SCANNING SETTINGS". (See Help in the
Web page for explanations of each of the settings.)
7
IF YOUR E-MAIL IS RETURNED
If a Scan to E-mail is not successfully transmitted, an e-mail informing you of this fact is sent to the return address
configured in the SMTP server. If this happens, read the e-mail and determine the cause of the error, and then
repeat the transmission.
- 22 -
TROUBLESHOOTING
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO E-MAIL
Be very careful not to send image data files that are too large.
Your mail server's system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e-mail
transmission. If this limit is exceeded, the e-mail will not be delivered to the recipient. Even if there is no limit and
your e-mail is successfully delivered, a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden
on the recipient's network, depending on the recipient's network (Internet) connection environment.
If large image data files are repeatedly sent, the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other,
unrelated data transmissions and in some cases, may even cause the mail server or network to go down.
The images on the following page will produce the following file sizes when scanned as 8-1/2" x 11" size or A4 size
originals:
Resolution
File size of text original A
when scanned
File size of photo original B when scanned
Mono 2 gradation
Grayscale
Full Color
75 dpi
Approx. 10 KB
Approx. 125 KB
Approx. 140 KB
300 dpi
Approx. 34 KB
Approx. 1430 KB
(Approx. 1.43 MB)
Approx. 1440 KB
(Approx. 1.44 MB)
* All sizes are for image files created in TIFF MMR (G4) format.
If multiple images are scanned, the file size will be approximately (Size of each image as indicated above) x
(Number of images scanned).
Although the actual limitation depends on your network environment, a general guideline for the maximum file size
for Scan to E-mail is 2000 KB (2 MB). In cases where you need to send multiple documents, try such measures as
lowering the resolution mode.
Original image samples
The original images shown below are samples to help you understand the above explanations. Note that these
images are smaller than the actual originals (the actual originals are 8-1/2" x 11" size).
Text original A
Photo original B
- 23 -
3
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS
To check the IP address of the machine, hold down the status button on the network expansion kit at least 2
seconds to print out a Printer Setting List.
Status button
3
HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT
To reset the network expansion kit, power on the machine while holding down the status button on the network
expansion kit.
Caution
Network scanner destination information and scanning settings will remain after the network expansion kit is
reset, however, the network settings and network printer settings will revert to the factory default settings.
- 24 -
4
SHARPDESK CD-ROM
(for Windows)
The CD-ROM contains the following software programs:
• Sharpdesk* (Desktop Document Management Software)
• Network Scanner Tool
• SHARP TWAIN AR/DM (Twain driver)
* Sharpdesk can only be installed on the number of computers indicated in "Sharpdesk Serial Numbers" on the
cover of "Important Information". If you need to install Sharpdesk on additional computers, please purchase the
optional license kit.
(If the version of the software on the CD-ROM in the license kit is different from the version of the software on the
CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, it is recommended that you use the newest version of the software.)
SOFTWARE PROGRAMS
For detailed information on each of the software programs, please refer to the user's guides on the CD-ROM.
To view the manuals in PDF format, Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader of Adobe Systems Incorporated is required. If
neither program is installed on your computer, the programs can be downloaded from the following URL:
http://www.adobe.com/
SHARPDESK (Desktop Document Management Software)
Sharpdesk lets you manage a variety of electronic information such as scanned image data from a Digital Laser
Copier/Printer or documents created using word processing or spreadsheet application software. Some of the
important features of Sharpdesk are:
• Sharpdesk works with your scanner to let you read paper documents into your computer using a full-featured set
of scanning controls and options.
• Sharpdesk makes editing of your images and documents quick and easy.
• A text image scanned into Sharpdesk can be converted into editable text for use with your favorite word processor.
Sharpdesk uses an advanced Optical Character Recognition (OCR) engine that even preserves your document layouts.
• Distributing documents by e-mail or printing a hard copy is as easy as dragging a file onto an icon on the
Sharpdesk OutputZone.
• Multiple files can be combined together into a single new file. After creating a combination file, the page order can
be changed or new pages added.
• You can search for an image or text file using a single word, phrase, or list of words. You can also perform a
detailed search by specifying the file type, modified data, or a keyword.
• A color image scanned on the machine can be saved as a PDF file using a high compression ratio to reduce the
file size. (To view a PDF file saved using a high compression ratio, the latest version of Adobe Reader is required.)
NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
This is a utility that helps you use Scan to Desktop. It configures the necessary settings in the Digital Laser
Copier/Printer and client computer to receive data. In addition, Network Scanner Tool will automatically start
Sharpdesk upon receiving image data.
The scanned image received by your computer can automatically be:
• Saved in a folder.
• Passed to the application set in Network Scanner Tool.
• Sent as e-mail.
• Saved in Sharpdesk.
SHARP TWAIN AR/DM
SHARP TWAIN AR/DM imports image data from a Twain interface into a Twain-compliant application. SHARP
TWAIN AR/DM has the following features:
• A selected range of the image data can be imported.
• The image can be rotated when imported.
- 25 -
4
USER'S GUIDES FOR SOFTWARE
PROGRAMS
The Manual folder in the CD-ROM contains user's guides (in PDF format) for each of the software programs.
• Sharpdesk Installation Guide
• Sharpdesk User's Guide
• Network Scanner Tool User's Guide
• SHARP TWAIN AR/DM User's Guide
In addition to explaining how to use the programs, the user's guides also give detailed instructions for installing and
setting up the programs. Be sure to read the user's guides before installing the programs.
4
- 26 -
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM
Note the following when installing the software program from the CD-ROM:
● Be sure to check the system requirements for installation of each of the software programs in the user's guides
and on the Information screen during installation.
● The user's guides give detailed instructions for installing and setting up the programs. Be sure to read the user's
guides before installing the programs. In particular, if you are going to use Network Scanner Tool, be sure to
carefully read the instructions regarding network preparation and setup procedures before installing the program.
The network administrator should verify that network preparation has been carried out correctly.
● If you are going to send an original scanned with the Digital Laser Copier/Printer to a computer (Scan to Desktop),
Network Scanner Tool must be installed.
● If you perform a standard installation of Sharpdesk (select "Typical" in the Setup Type selection screen), Network
Scanner Tool will be also be installed, alternatively you can also select "Custom" installation and install only
Network Scanner Tool.
● If Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is not installed on your computer, see the installation procedure for Internet
Explorer in the Readme file (Readme.txt) in the root folder of the "Disc 2" CD-ROM.
● If you intend to install SHARP TWAIN AR/DM, install Network Scanner Tool first. SHARP TWAIN AR/DM cannot
be installed alone.
● The contents of the Information screens that appear during installation can also be found in the ReadMe files on
the same CD-ROM. The ReadMe file for Sharpdesk is located in the root folder of the CD-ROM, and the ReadMe
file for SHARP TWAIN AR/DM is located in the Twain folder.
INSTALLING SHARPDESK AND NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
1
Quit any software applications and/or
resident programs that are running on
your computer.
2
Insert the "Disc 1" CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.
6
• The Sharpdesk installation screen appears.
Proceed to step 6.
• If the screen does not appear, proceed to step
3.
3
Click the "start" button and then click
"My Computer" ( ).
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double click "My
Computer".
• In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button and
then click "Computer".
4
Double click the CD-ROM icon (
).
The Sharpdesk installer starts.
5
Follow the instructions on the screen.
In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears
asking you for confirmation, click "Allow".
- 27 -
When the "Customer Information"
window appears, enter the serial
number that appears on the cover of the
this manual, and click the "Next" button.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
• If you select "Typical" in the Setup Type
selection screen, Network Scanner Tool will
also be installed. If you only wish to install
Network Scanner Tool, select "Custom" in the
Setup Type selection screen and then check
only Network Scanner Tool.
• Sharpdesk Imaging* is installed together with
Sharpdesk. If Imaging for Windows was
previously installed, Sharpdesk Imaging will
overwrite Imaging for Windows.
• If Eastman Software's "Imaging for Windows
Professional Edition" has already been installed
on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will not
be installed.
• "Imaging for Windows Professional Edition" and
Sharpdesk Imaging use common registry
entries, and installing "Imaging for Windows
Professional Edition" after Sharpdesk lmaging
has been installed may result in abnormal
operation. In this case, uninstall Sharpdesk and
Sharpdesk Imaging, and then install "Imaging
for Windows Professional Edition". After that,
reinstall Sharpdesk.
• When Network Scanner Tool setup is finished, the
"Search Setup Wizard" appears. Follow the
on-screen instructions to create an index database.
For detailed information, see the Sharpdesk
Installation Guide and Sharpdesk User's Guide.
* Sharpdesk Imaging is a version of Eastman
Software's Imaging for Windows Professional
Edition that has been customized by the
Sharp Corporation.
4
SHARPDESK CD-ROM (for Windows)
INSTALLING SHARP TWAIN AR/DM
SHARP TWAIN AR/DM cannot be used in Windows Vista.
1
Quit any software applications and/or
resident programs that are running on
your computer.
2
Insert the "Disc 1" CD-ROM into your
CD-ROM drive.
If the Sharpdesk installation window appears,
click "Cancel" to exit the setup procedure.
3
4
Click the CD-ROM icon ( ) and select
"Open" from the "File" menu.
5
Double-click the "Twain" folder, and
then double-click the "SETUP" icon
( ).
6
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Click the "start" button and then click
"My Computer" ( ).
4
In Windows 98/Me/2000, double click "My
Computer".
UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
PROGRAM
To remove the software, follow the steps below.
● When Sharpdesk is uninstalled, Network Scanner Tool is also uninstalled. Note that if Network Scanner Tool is
uninstalled, you will no longer be able to directly receive image data from the Digital Laser Copier/Printer.
● If a user-created file is saved in the Sharpdesk desktop folder, the Sharpdesk desktop folder will not be deleted
when Sharpdesk is uninstalled.
● If you uninstall Sharpdesk Imaging in Windows 98/Me/2000, you will not be able to open image files unless you
re-install the Windows accessory Imaging for Windows.
● Removing SHARP TWAIN AR/DM will not delete the spooler folder which stores image data.
UNINSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM FROM
THE CONTROL PANEL
1
3
Click "Control Panel" in the "start"
menu.
In Windows 98/Me/2000, click "Start", "Settings",
and then "Control Panel".
2
Double click "Add or Remove
Programs".
• In Windows 98/Me/2000, double click
"Add/Remove Programs".
• In Windows Vista, click "Uninstall a program".
- 28 -
Select the application that you wish to
delete ("Sharpdesk" or "SHARP
TWAIN AR/DM") from the list and
uninstall the software.
5
SPECIFICATIONS
For information on power requirements, power consumption, dimensions, weight, and other specifications that are
common to all features of the machine, refer to the operation manual for the machine.
File format
File type: TIFF/PDF/JPEG
Compression mode: MH (G3)/MMR (G4)/None
File creation method
One file for all pages/One file per each 1 to 6 pages
Scan destinations
Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, Scan to E-mail
Supported client PC operating systems (for
Scan to Desktop function)
Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition,
Windows XP Professional, Windows Vista
Web browser
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Windows),
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later
Management system
Uses built-in Web server
Network protocol
TCP/IP, SMTP, LDAP, FTP
Supported mail system
Mail servers supporting SMTP
LAN connectivity
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
Number of destinations
200 maximum
Number of destinations for Scan To E-mail
broadcast transmission
100 maximum*
* Multiple e-mail addresses (up to 100) can be stored as a group. Note that this may reduce the maximum number
of destinations (normally 200) that can be stored.
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
- 29 -
5
AR-NB2 A (for network scanner)
AR-NB2 A
Network expansion kit Online Manual
(for network printer)
Start
Click this "Start" button.
Introduction
The optional network expansion kit enables the machine to be used as a network printer.
This manual explains the network printer functions that can be used when the network expansion kit is installed.
To use the machine as a PS printer, the PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) must be installed. After installing the expansion kit, the product key
(password) must be entered in "Product Key Setting" in the Web page (this is only required once). Please consult your dealer for the product
key to be entered.
●
Note
This manual refers to the digital multifunctional system AR-208S/208D as "the machine".
For information on copier functions, adding paper and toner, removing misfeeds, using peripheral equipment, and other general
information, see the operation manual for the machine. For information on the scanner functions that can be used when the
network expansion kit is installed, see the online manual for network scanner that accompanies the network expansion kit.
● The machine's default settings and default settings for the printer function can be changed using the user programs. For more
information, see the operation manual for the machine.
● Where "XX-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model.
● This manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".
● The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows® XP in Windows® environments, and Mac
OS X v10.4 in Macintosh environments. The screens may vary in other versions of the operating systems.
● For information on using your operating system, refer to your operating system's manual or online Help.
● The PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) mentioned in this manual is an option.
●
Trademark Acknowledgments
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista® and Internet
Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
● Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
● Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and other countries.
● PCL is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
● PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
● All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
●
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product
improvements and modifications.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
2
How to use the online manual
This section explains how to view the online manual. Please read this section before using the online manual.
For information on using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader Help.
How to Control the Online Manual
Following Links
In this manual, the following buttons are displayed at the bottom
of each page. Click these buttons to move quickly to pages that
you wish to view.
This manual uses a link function that allows you to jump to a
related page. If you click green, underlined text, the related
page will be displayed. (In the Contents and Index sections, the
linked areas are not underlined.)
Example: ☞Contents
To return to the previous page, click the button on the menu
bar of Acrobat Reader.
CO N T EN T S
Displays the Contents of this manual. Click on a topic in the
Contents to jump directly to that section.
Using Bookmarks
Bookmarks have been created on the left side of this manual.
You can click on a bookmark to jump directly to that section.
I N D E X
Displays the Index of this manual. Click on a topic in the Index
to jump directly to that section.
How to Print Out This Manual
To print this manual, select "Print" from the "File" menu of
Acrobat Reader. Select the desired printer settings in the "Print"
dialog box, and then click the "OK" button.
Takes you forward page by page.
Takes you back page by page.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
3
Contents
Introduction
How to use the online manual
(part 1)
2
3
2 PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Printer utilities
●
1 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
If the tray runs out of paper during printing
Cancel a print job
● When "Paper Source" is set to "Auto Select"
●
Opening the printer driver from the "start" button
Printer driver settings
Two-sided printing
●
Pamphlet style
●
How to Print a Watermark
17
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
18
●
Starting up the printer utilities
● Using the printer utilities
● Changing the Printer Status Monitor settings
● Checking the printer status
18
18
19
20
3 PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
21
●
If the tray runs out of paper during printing
Cancel a print job
● When "Paper Feed" is set to "Auto Select"
22
22
22
●
15
Printing text and lines/graphics in black
●
Printing text in black
● Printing lines and vector graphics in black
CONTENTS
7
7
7
11
Printing multiple pages on one page
Fitting the printed image to the paper
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
Printing a watermark
Before using the Printer Status Monitor
Using the printer utilities
6
●
17
I N D E X
16
16
16
4
Contents
(part 2)
4 WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
About the Web pages
●
23
How to access the Web page and view help
About the Web pages (for users)
Directly printing a file in a computer
●
5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Advanced job settings
23
24
25
25
Configuring the printer condition settings
●
How to configure the settings
Printer condition setting menu
● Printer condition settings
●
Setting up the E-mail print function
● Using the E-mail print function
Key operator programs
●
●
Check the connections
41
Removing the software
42
●
Windows
● Macintosh (Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2)
42
42
27
28
29
34
35
6 SPECIFICATIONS
Printer specifications
Printer driver specifications
43
44
7 INDEX
36
Configuring a setting in the key operator programs
Key operator programs
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
●
Information setup
SMTP setup
● Status message setup
● Alerts message setup
36
37
38
38
38
39
40
●
CONTENTS
●
41
26
About the Web pages (for the administrator)
32
Protecting information programmed in the web page ([Passwords]) 33
E-mail print function
34
●
Troubleshooting
I N D E X
5
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
(part 1)
The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
1
Start WordPad and open the document that you
wish to print.
2
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
menu.
3
Make sure that "SHARP XX-XXXX" is selected as
the printer. If you need to change any print
settings, click the "Preferences" button
("Properties" button in Windows 98/Me) to open
the printer driver setup screen.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
The "Print" dialog box will appear.
Windows 2000 does not have the "Preferences" button
in this dialog box. Select settings as needed on each of
the tabs in the setup screen.
☞Printer driver settings, Two-sided printing,
Printing multiple pages on one page,
Fitting the printed image to the paper,
Rotating the print image 180 degrees,
Printing a watermark
4
Click the "Print" button ("OK" button in
Windows 98/Me).
Printing begins.
The print job is delivered to the output tray, with the
position of the paper offset slightly from the previous job
(offset function).
CONTENTS
I N D E X
6
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Basic printing
(part 2)
If the tray runs out of paper during printing
When "Paper Source" is set to "Auto Select"
Printing will automatically resume when paper is loaded in the
tray.
When using the bypass tray, select printer mode with the mode
select key on the machine, load paper as instructed by the
message in the display, and then press the [START] key to
resume printing.
If "Paper Source" is set to "Auto Select" in the "Paper" tab of the
printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for a
print job is not loaded in the machine, the printing procedure will
vary depending on the "FORCED OUTPUT" setting in the user
programs (see "USER PROGRAMS" in the Operation Manual).
When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed:
Select printer mode with the mode select key on the machine,
check the message in the display, load paper in the bypass tray,
and then press the [START] key to begin printing.
Note that if the "AUTO TRAY SWITCH" setting in the user
programs is enabled and there is the same size of paper in
another tray, the machine will automatically switch to the other
tray and continue printing.
When "FORCED OUTPUT" is set to "OFF"
When "FORCED OUTPUT" is set to "ON"
Printing takes place on the paper loaded in the machine, even
though the paper size is different from the print image size.
Cancel a print job
To cancel a print job that is already in progress, select printer
mode with the mode select key on the machine and then press
the [CLEAR] key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
"CANCEL PRINT JOB?" will appear in the display. Select "YES"
and press the [ENTER] key.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
7
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
1
Opening the printer driver from the "start" button
Printer driver settings can be configured by opening the printer driver from the Windows "start" button. Settings adjusted in this way
will be the initial settings when you print from an application. (If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time
of printing, the settings will revert to the initial settings when you quit the application.)
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista
1
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
On Windows 2000, click the "Start" button and select
"Settings".
● On Windows Server 2003, click the "Start" button and
then click "Printers and Faxes". Go to step 3.
●
2
1
2
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings" and
then click "Printers".
3
On Windows 98/Me, click the "Setup" tab.
Click the "SHARP XX-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then
click "Printers and Faxes".
●
●
3
Windows 98/Me
On Windows Vista, click "Printer".
On Windows 2000, click "Printers".
Click the "SHARP XX-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
☞Printer driver settings
On Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize" menu.
4
Click the "Printing Preferences" button in the
"General" tab.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
☞Printer driver settings
CONTENTS
I N D E X
8
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printer driver settings
To view Help for a setting, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the window and then click the setting.
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen. When a restriction is
in effect, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction.
1 Tab
6 Check button
The settings are grouped
Allows you to select one
1
on tabs. Click on a tab to
item from a list of options.
bring it to the front.
7 "OK" button
2
2 Drop-down list
Click this button to save
your settings and exit the
Allows you to make a
3
dialog box.
selection from a list of
choices.
8 "Cancel" button
Click this button to exit the
3 Print setting image
dialog box without making
This shows the effect of the
any changes to the
selected print settings.
4
settings.
4 Checkbox
9 "Apply" button
Click on a checkbox to
5
Click to save your settings
activate or deactivate a
without closing the dialog
function.
box.
5 Machine image
6
10 "Help" button
The paper tray (in blue)
7
Click this button to display
selected in "Paper selection"
8
the help file for the printer
on the "Paper" tab.
driver.
9
You can also click on a tray
10
to select it.
Note
The settings and the image of the machine will vary depending on the model.
The printer driver setup screen allows you to select various functions that can be used when the
network expansion kit is installed.
For information on the printer functions of the network expansion kit, see "Printer driver specifications".
CONTENTS
I N D E X
9
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Two-sided printing
(part 1)
The printer driver setup screen of models that support two-sided printing contains a "Document
Style" setting in the "Main" tab. This feature allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Sided (Book)" or
"2-Sided (Tablet)" from "Document Style" in the "Main" tab.
☞See Basic printing for details on how to open the printer driver.
●
Note
●
Paper sizes that can be used for two-sided printing are Letter, Legal, Folio*, Invoice, A4, A5, B5, Foolscap, and 16K.
When using two-sided printing, select a source other than "Bypass Tray" for the "Paper Source" in the "Paper" tab.
* For two-sided printing on Folio size paper, "Tray 1" or "Tray 2" (if Tray 2 has been installed) must be selected in the "Paper
Source" on the "Paper" tab.
The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper.
Print data
Printing result
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that
they can be bound at the side. they can be bound at the top.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
10
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Two-sided printing
(part 2)
Pamphlet style
Pamphlet style prints two pages each on the front and back of each sheet of paper (four pages total on
one sheet) so that the sheets can be folded down the center and bound to create a pamphlet. This
function is convenient when you wish to compile printed pages into a pamphlet.
To use this function, open the printer driver and select "Pamphlet Style" in "Document Style" in the
"Main" tab.
The direction of opening of the pamphlet can be selected with the "Right Turning Pamphlet" checkbox in
the "Advanced" tab. The following examples show how 8 pages are printed when pamphlet style is
selected.
Printing result
Print data
Right Turning Pamphlet
Right Turning Pamphlet
●
Note
Only letter, invoice, A4 and A5 size paper can be used for pamphlet style printing.
Because four pages are printed on each sheet of paper, blank pages are automatically added at the end when the total number
of pages is not a multiple of four.
● When "Tiled Pamphlet" is selected, printing will take place on paper that is twice the size of the paper size specified in the application.
● When "2-Up Pamphlet" is selected, each page is reduced in the same way as for 2-Up and printed on the size of paper that is
specified in the application.
●
CONTENTS
I N D E X
11
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printing multiple pages on one page
This feature allows you to reduce and print two, four, six, eight or sixteen document pages on a single sheet of paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select the number of pages per sheet (2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, or
16-Up) in "N-Up Printing" in the "Main" tab.
The order of the pages can be changed in the "Order" menu.
☞See Basic printing for details on how to open the printer driver.
Note
The "N-Up Printing" setting is not available when "Fit To Paper Size" is selected.
☞Fitting the printed image to the paper
For example, when "2-Up" or "4-Up" is selected, the result will be as follows depending on the selected order.
N-Up
Left to Right
Right to Left
[2-Up]
N-Up
Right , and Down Down , and Right
Left , and Down
Down , and Left
[4-Up]
If you select the "Border" checkbox, borderlines will be printed around each page.
Note
Examples for 2-Up and 4-Up are shown here. The order of 6-Up, 8-Up, and 16-Up is the same as 4-Up. The order can be viewed
in the print setting image in the printer driver setup screen.
☞Printer driver settings
CONTENTS
I N D E X
12
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
1
Fitting the printed image to the paper
The printer driver can adjust the size of the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Follow the steps shown below to use this function. The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a letter size document on
invoice size paper.
☞See Basic printing for details on how to open the printer driver.
Note
1
2
3
The "Fit To Paper Size" setting is not available when "N-Up Printing" is selected.
☞Printing multiple pages on one page
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup
screen.
Select the original size (Letter) of the print
image in "Paper Size".
4
Select the actual size of paper to be used for
printing (Invoice).
The size of the printed image will be automatically
adjusted to match the paper loaded in the machine.
Paper Size: Letter
Fit To Paper Size: Invoice
Check the "Fit to Page" box.
When using the PS printer driver, select "Fit To Paper
Size" in "Zoom Setting".
Letter size document
(Paper Size)
Invoice size paper
(Fit To Paper Size)
●
Note
If "A3 [Fit to Page]", "B4 [Fit to Page]", or "Ledger [Fit to Page]" is selected, the print image is fit to the letter size even if "Fit to
Page" is not selected.
● When using the PS printer driver, the print image can be enlarged or reduced by means of numerical values. (The vertical and horizontal
ratios can be set separately.) Select "XY-Zoom" in step 3, click the "Width/Length" button, and adjust the ratios in the screen that appears.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
13
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
The print image can be rotated 180 degrees.
This feature is used to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps that can
only be loaded in one orientation.
To use the feature, select the image orientation in "Image Orientation" on the "Paper" tab, and
then select the "Rotate 180 degrees" checkbox.
☞See Basic printing for details on how to open the printer driver.
Printing result
Rotate 180 degrees
ABCD
Note
Rotate 180 degrees
ABCD
The procedure for loading paper is explained in the operation manual for the machine.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
14
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
Printing a watermark
You can print a watermark such as "CONFIDENTIAL" on your document. To print a watermark, open the printer driver, click the
"Watermarks" tab, and follow the steps below.
☞See Basic printing for details on how to open the printer driver.
How to Print a Watermark
From the "Watermark" drop-down list, select the watermark that you wish to print (for example "CONFIDENTIAL"), and start printing.
Print sample
You can enter text to create your own custom watermark. For details on watermark settings, view printer driver Help.
☞Printer driver settings
CONTENTS
I N D E X
15
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
1
Printing text and lines/graphics in black
Color text, lines and vector graphics that are faint when printed normally can be printed in black to improve legibility.
Printing text in black
Printing lines and vector graphics in black
Text that is any color other than white is printed in black.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and
select the "Text To Black" checkbox in the "Advanced" tab.
Lines and vector graphics that are any color other than white
are printed in black.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and
select the "Vector To Black" checkbox in the "Advanced" tab.
Print data
ABCD
EFGH
Printing result
Text To Black
Text To Black
ABCD
EFGH
Print data
Printing result
Vector To Black
Vector To Black
ABCD
EFGH
●
Note
When using the PCL6 printer driver, if "Print as
graphics" is selected in "TrueType Mode" of "Font" in
the "Advanced" tab, this function cannot be used.
● When using the PCL5e printer driver, if "Raster" is
selected in "Graphics mode" in the "Advanced" tab,
this function cannot be used.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
Note
When using the PCL6 or PCL5e printer driver, if "Raster"
is selected in "Graphics mode" in the "Advanced" tab,
this function cannot be used.
16
2
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Printer utilities
Printer Status Monitor (for general users)
Before using the Printer Status Monitor
"Printer Status Monitor" is on the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 1).
This allows the user to check on the computer screen whether
or not the machine is able to print.
It provides information on error states such as paper misfeeds
and shows the configuration of the machine (number of trays,
etc.) by means of illustrations. Available paper sizes and paper
remaining are also indicated.
Note the following points before using the Printer Status
Monitor.
When the first print job is executed after starting up the Printer
Status Monitor, the machine's IP address is automatically set in
the Printer Status Monitor.
Printer Administration Utility (for administrators)
Direct printing without a server
"Printer Administration Utility" is on the "Software CD-ROM"
(Disc 2).
This allows the administrator to check information on supplies
and error states of the machine and other SHARP printers
(compatible with the Printer Administration Utility) that are
connected to the network. Settings can also be changed via the
utility.
Install and configure the software as explained in "INSTALLING
THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide for
network printer. (This is not necessary if the software has
already been installed and configured.)
Printing via a server
●
Note
In order to use the Printer Status Monitor and Printer
Administration Utility, the machine must be connected
to a network.
● To install the Printer Status Monitor, see the network
expansion kit online manual (for setup).
CONTENTS
I N D E X
17
2
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
Using the printer utilities
(part 1)
Starting up the printer utilities
Using the printer utilities
If the Printer Status Monitor or Printer Administration Utility is
not running, use the following procedure to start the utilities.
For information on using the Printer Status Monitor and Printer
Administration Utility, see the Help files for each. The Help files
can be viewed as follows:
Note
When the Printer Administration Utility is first started up,
the TCP/IP settings window appears. To monitor the
machine on a local network, select the "Local Subnet
Search" checkbox. Otherwise, enter the machine's IP
address. For more information, see the Help file.
Printer Status Monitor
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista)
and then "SHARP Printer Status Monitor". Select "Help".
Printer Status Monitor
Printer Administration Utility
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista)
and then "SHARP Printer Status Monitor". Select "Printer
Status Monitor".
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista)
and then "SHARP Printer Administration Utility". Select "Help".
Printer Administration Utility
Click the "Start" button, point to "All Programs" ("Programs" in
operating systems other than Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista)
and then "SHARP Printer Administration Utility". Select "Printer
Administration Utility".
CONTENTS
I N D E X
18
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
2
Using the printer utilities
(part 2)
Changing the Printer Status Monitor settings
Once installed, the Printer Status Monitor normally runs in the background in Windows. If you need to change the Printer Status
Monitor settings, follow the steps below.
1
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon ( )
on the task bar, and select "Preferences" from
the pop-up menu.
Note
2
Change the Printer Status Monitor settings as desired.
For information on the Printer Status Monitor settings,
see Printer Status Monitor Help. (Click the "Help" button
in the settings window.)
If the Printer Status Monitor icon does not appear on the
task bar, see "Starting up the printer utilities" to start the
Printer Status Monitor.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
19
PRINTER UTILITIES (WINDOWS)
2
Using the printer utilities
(part 3)
Checking the printer status
The Printer Status Monitor allows you to check whether or not toner and paper remain in the machine.
S
1
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon ( )
on the task bar, and select "SHARP XX-XXXX
Status" from the pop-up menu.
Note
2
The icon turns red when printing is not possible due to a
machine error or other problem.
Click the "Detail" button.
To collapse the window, click the "Hide detail" button.
The window expands to show machine status details.
Note
CONTENTS
I N D E X
By default, the collapsed window initially appears when
"SHARP XX-XXXX Status" is selected in Step 1. If
desired, you can change the setting to have the
expanded window initially appear.
☞Changing the Printer Status Monitor settings
20
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
3
Basic printing
(part 1)
To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, the PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) must be installed and the machine must be
connected to a network. To install the PPD file and configure the printer driver settings, see the software setup guide.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
1
Start the application and open the document
that you wish to print.
2
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
menu.
3
Make sure that the correct printer is selected.
4
Configure print settings.
Click
next to "Copies &
Pages" ("General" in Mac OS
9.0 to 9.2.2) and select the
settings that you wish to
configure from the pull-down
menu. The corresponding
setting screen will appear.
Note
5
Note
The settings vary depending on the operating system
version, the printer driver version, and the application.
Click the "Print" button.
The Print window varies depending on the operating
system version, the printer driver version, and the
application.
Printing begins.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
21
3
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH
Basic printing
(part 2)
If the tray runs out of paper during printing
When "Paper Feed" is set to "Auto Select"
Printing will automatically resume when paper is loaded in the
tray.
When using the bypass tray, select printer mode with the mode
select key on the machine, load paper as instructed by the
message in the display, and then press the [START] key to
resume printing.
If "Paper Feed" is set to "Auto Select" in the Print window and the
correct size of paper for a print job is not loaded in the machine,
the printing procedure will vary depending on the "FORCED
OUTPUT" setting in the user programs (see "USER
PROGRAMS" in the Operation Manual).
When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed:
Select printer mode with the mode select key on the machine,
check the message in the display, load paper in the bypass tray,
and then press the [START] key to begin printing.
Note that if the "AUTO TRAY SWITCH" setting in the user
programs is enabled and there is the same size of paper in
another tray, the machine will automatically switch to the other
tray and continue printing.
When "FORCED OUTPUT" is set to "OFF"
When "FORCED OUTPUT" is set to "ON"
Printing takes place on the paper loaded in the machine, even
though the paper size is different from the print image size.
Cancel a print job
To cancel a print job that is already in progress, select printer
mode with the mode select key on the machine and then press
the [CLEAR] key ( ) or the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
"CANCEL PRINT JOB?" will appear in the display. Select "YES"
and press the [ENTER] key.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
22
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
About the Web pages
The network expansion kit includes a built-in Web server. The Web server is accessed using a Web browser on your computer. The Web
pages include both pages for users and pages for the administrator. In the user Web pages, users can monitor the machine, directly print
a file specified on a computer, and select printer configuration settings. In the administrator Web pages, the administrator can configure
the machine's e-mail settings, settings for print by e-mail, and passwords. Only the administrator is allowed to configure these settings.
How to access the Web page and view help
Use the following procedure to access the Web pages. [Help] can be clicked at the bottom of the menu frame to view information on
the various function settings that can be configured remotely over the network from the machine's Web pages. For the settings of
each function, see the explanations in Help.
1
2
Open the Web browser on your computer.
Supported browsers:
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later (Windows)
Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later
3
Click the [Help] button at the bottom of the
menu frame.
To view information on a function
setting, click the corresponding
item in the Help screen.
In the "Address" field of your Web browser,
enter the IP address that has been configured in
the machine.
4
When the connection is completed, the Web page will
appear in your Web browser.
When finished, close the Web pages.
When you have finished using
the Web pages, click the
(close) button in the top right
corner of the page.
☞About the Web pages (for users)
CONTENTS
I N D E X
23
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
About the Web pages (for users)
When you access the user Web pages in the machine, the following page will appear in your browser.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the right frame that
allows you to configure settings for that item.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)Menu frame
Click a setting in the menu to configure it.
(2)System Information
Shows the current status of the machine and model name.
• Device Status
Shows the current status of the machine, paper trays,
output trays, toner and other supplies, and page counts.
Out of paper and other warnings appear in red.
• Device Configuration
Shows what options are installed.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
• Network Status
Shows the network status. Information on "General",
"TCP/IP", "NetWare", "AppleTalk", and "NetBEUI" is shown
on the respective pages.
(3)Submit Print Job
A file on a computer can be printed out.
☞Directly printing a file in a computer
(4)Printer Test Page
The "Printer Settings List" and various font lists can be
printed.
(5)Condition Settings
Configure basic printer settings.
☞Configuring the printer condition settings
(6)Admin Mode
To open the Web pages for the administrator, click here and
then enter the administrator's user name and password.
☞About the Web pages (for the administrator)
☞Protecting information programmed in the web page
([Passwords])
24
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Directly printing a file in a computer
A file that can be accessed by your computer can be directly printed without using the printer driver by specifying the file's address.
Any file that can be accessed by your computer can be printed by this method, including not only files on your computer but files on
other computers connected to the same network.
To directly print a file by this method, click [Submit Print Job] in the menu frame of the Web page.
1
Click [Submit Print Job] in the link menu.
The "Submit Print Job" screen
will appear.
3
Click [Browse] and select the file that you wish
to print.
You can also directly enter the file name (with the path).
4
Click [Print].
Printing begins.
Advanced job settings
2
Select the print format in "Job Detail".
The settings are described in the table below.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
Item
Description
Factory
default setting
Copies
Set the number of copies from 1 to 999.
1
Paper Size
Select the size of paper to be used for
printing.
Not Specified
Orientation
Select the printing orientation. (Portrait /
Portrait
Landscape)
Binding
Edge
Select the binding position for two-sided
Left
printing. (Left / Top)
Duplex
To print on both sides of the paper, select
Not selected
this checkbox. (Only for models that
support the two-sided printing.)
25
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 1)
The printer condition settings allow basic printer settings to be configured. The following items can be set:
Default Settings: Basic settings that are mainly used when
the printer driver is not used.
● PCL Settings:
PCL symbol set, font, line feed code, and
other settings.
●
Note
PostScript Settings*:
Sets whether or not a PostScript
error page is printed when a
PostScript error occurs.
* This setting is only appears when the PS3 expansion kit is
installed.
●
When the printer driver is used and the same settings are configured both in the printer driver and in the above screens, the settings
configured in the printer driver override the settings in the above screens. If a setting is available in the printer driver, use the printer
driver to configure the setting.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
26
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 2)
How to configure the settings
To display the Condition Settings screen, click [Condition Settings] in the menu frame.
For detailed explanations of the procedures for establishing settings, click [Help] in the menu frame.
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(1)Condition Settings
This displays the page for configuring the printer condition
settings.
(2)Default / PCL / PS
Select the type of condition settings that you wish to
configure.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
(3)Settings
The factory default settings are displayed.
Change the settings as desired by selecting from drop-down
lists and by directly entering settings.
For information on the settings, see "Printer condition settings".
(4)Submit
Click to store the Web page settings in the machine.
27
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 3)
Printer condition setting menu
Click on a setting to view an explanation of the setting.
Condition Settings
Default Settings
Condition Settings
Factory default settings
PCL Settings
Factory default settings
Copies
1
Symbol Set
PC-8
Orientation
Portrait
Font
0: Courier (internal font)
Default Paper Size
Letter
Line Feed Code
CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
Default Paper Source
Auto
Wide A4
Disable
2-Sided Print
1-Sided
ROPM (Rip Once, Print Many) Enable
PostScript Settings*
Print PS Errors
Factory default settings
Disable
* This setting is only appears when the PS3 expansion kit is
installed.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
28
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 4)
Printer condition settings
Factory default settings are indicated in bold.
Default Settings
Item
Copies
Orientation
Selections
1 - 999
Portrait, Landscape
Default Paper Size
Invoice, Letter,
Foolscap, Legal
Default Paper Source
Auto,
Tray 1,
Tray 2*,
Bypass (Auto)
1-Sided,
2-Sided (Book),
2-Sided (Tablet)
2-Sided Print
ROPM (Rip Once, Print
Many)
CONTENTS
Enable, Disable
I N D E X
Description
This is used to select the number of copies.
This sets the orientation of the printed page. Select [Portrait] when the image
is longer in the vertical direction, or [Landscape] when the image is longer in
the horizontal direction.
This sets the default paper size used for the printed image. Even if the set size
of paper is not in any of the trays, the printed image is formed in accordance
with this setting.
Set the default paper tray.
*Selections available depend on the trays that are installed.
When [2-Sided (Book)] is selected, two-sided printing takes place so as to allow
binding at the left side. When [2-Sided (Tablet)] is selected, two-sided printing
takes place so as to allow binding at the top. (Only for models that support
two-sided printing.)
This enables the ROPM function. When enabled, multi-page print jobs are
stored in memory before printing, and thus the computer does not need to
repeatedly send the print data when multiple copies are printed.
29
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 5)
PCL Settings
Item
Symbol Set
Selections
Select one of 35 sets.
Font
Select one internal or
one external font.
Line Feed Code
CR=CR; LF=LF;
FF=FF,
CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;
FF=FF,
CR=CR; LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF,
CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF
Enable, Disable
Wide A4
CONTENTS
I N D E X
Description
This specifies which country's characters (PCL symbol set) are assigned to
certain of the symbols in the character code list. The factory default setting is
[PC-8].
This specifies which PCL font to use for printing. One font can be specified from
among the internal fonts and extended fonts (when the barcode font kit or the
Flash ROM kit is installed). The factory default setting is [0: Courier].
This specifies the line break code by means of a combination of the "CR"
(return) code, "LF" (line break) code, and "FF" (page break) code. The factory
default setting is printing based on the transmitted code. The setting can be
changed by selecting one of four combinations.
This setting can be enabled to print 80 lines on A4 size paper with each line
10CPI font (English characters). When the setting is disabled (a checkmark
does not appear), each line is 78 characters long.
30
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Configuring the printer condition settings
(part 6)
PostScript Settings
The "PostScript Settings" are only effective when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Item
Print PS Errors
CONTENTS
Selections
Enable, Disable
I N D E X
Description
When this setting is enabled, an error description is printed each time a
PostScript error occurs.
31
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
About the Web pages (for the administrator)
In addition to the menus that appear for users, other menus that can only be used by the administrator appear in the administrator Web pages.
A menu frame appears on the left side of the page. When you click an item in the menu, a screen appears in the right frame that
allows you to configure settings for that item. Settings that can only be configured by the administrator are explained here.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1)Information
Configure machine identification information for the status &
alert E-mail function.
☞Information setup
(2)Passwords
To protect the Web site, the system administrator can
establish passwords. Enter a password that you would like to
establish and click the [Submit] button.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
One password can be established for the administrator and
one password can be established for users.
☞Protecting information programmed in the web page
([Passwords])
(3)Key Operator Programs
Setting changes can be prohibited and interface settings can
be configured.
☞Key operator programs
(4)Status Message
Configure parameters required for sending status
messages, such as destination addresses and time
schedules.
☞Status message setup
(5)Alerts Message
Store destination addresses for alert messages.
☞Alerts message setup
(6)Security
Unused ports can be disabled for greater security and port
numbers can be changed.
(7)Services
Configure information concerning the e-mail system.
☞SMTP setup
(8)Print Port
Configure settings for e-mail print.
☞Setting up the E-mail print function
32
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
4
Protecting information programmed in the web page ([Passwords])
Passwords can be set (click [Passwords] in the menu frame) to restrict Web page access and protect settings. The administrator
must change the password from the factory default setting. The administrator must also take care to remember the new password.
The next time the Web pages are accessed, the new password must be entered.
A password can be set for the administrator and a password can be set for users.
1
Click [Passwords] in the menu frame.
3
Enter passwords in "User Password" and
"Admin Password".
• A maximum of 7 characters and/or numbers can be
entered for each password (passwords are case
sensitive).
• Be sure to enter the same password in "Confirm
Password" as you did in "New Password".
2
Enter the current password in "Admin
Password".
When establishing a password for the first time, enter
"Sharp" in "Admin Password".
Caution
Be sure to enter "S" in upper case and "harp" in
lower case (passwords are case sensitive).
CONTENTS
I N D E X
4
When you have finished entering all items, click
[Submit].
The entered password is stored.
After setting the password, turn the machine power
off and then back on.
Note
When prompted to enter a password, a user should
enter "user" and an administrator should enter "admin"
in "User Name". In "Password", the respective password
for the entered user name should be entered.
For more information, click [Help] in the upper right-hand
corner of the window.
33
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
E-mail print function
(part 1)
An e-mail account can be set up for the machine. When this is done, the machine will periodically check the e-mail server for e-mail
and automatically print out any file attachments it receives. This provides a means for printing a file from a computer that does not
have the printer driver installed, as the user can simply send the file to the machine as an e-mail attachment.
Setting up the E-mail print function
To use the e-mail print function, the machine must have an e-mail account.
1
Click [Print Port] in the menu frame.
3
For detailed information, Click [Help] in the upper
right-hand corner of the window.
The "Print Port Setup" page
appears.
4
2
Enter the information regarding the e-mail
environment.
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
Click [E-mail print].
CONTENTS
I N D E X
34
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
4
E-mail print function
(part 2)
Using the E-mail print function
To use the e-mail print function, attach the file that you wish to print to an e-mail message and send the e-mail to the machine's
e-mail address.
The machine can print the following file types:
PCLXL, PCL5e, PS, PDF, and TIFF, with file extensions pcl, ps, pdf, tiff, and tif
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are
entered in the format "command name = value".
The following control commands can be entered:
Function
Command name
Value
Entry example
Copies
COPIES
1-999
COPIES=2
Two-sided print
DUPLEX
OFF, TOP, LEFT
DUPLEX=LEFT
File type
LANGUAGE
AUTO, PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF
LANGUAGE=TIFF
Paper
PAPER
Name of available paper (LETTER, etc.)
PAPER=A4
●
Note
Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
● To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
● If an e-mail is sent with nothing entered in the message, printing will take place according to the settings in the condition settings
menu in the Web page "Default Settings".
● To print PS and PDF files, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
● An encrypted PDF file cannot be printed.
● Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file type.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
35
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
Key operator programs
(part 1)
The key operator programs are used to prohibit changes to the [Condition Settings] and to configure interface settings.
• Default Settings: Select the setting for which you wish to prohibit changes.
• Interface settings: Enable monitoring of data sent to the network port and set restrictions.
Configuring a setting in the key operator programs
1
Click [Key operator programs] in the menu
frame.
The "Default Settings" screen of
the [Key operator programs] will
appear. If you wish to select a
setting in the "Default Settings"
screen, go to step 3.
2
3
Make a selection for the setting in the screen
that appears.
See Key operator programs for descriptions of the
settings.
4
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
Click the desired setting.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
36
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
4
Key operator programs
(part 2)
Key operator programs
When "YES, NO" appears in the "Settings" column, "YES" is selected when a checkmark appears in the checkbox of the item, and
"NO" is selected when checkmark does not appear.
Default settings
Item
Settings
Description
Prohibit Test
Page Printing
YES, NO
This setting is used to prohibit printing of a printer test page.
Disable Default
Setting Changes
YES, NO
This setting is used to prohibit changes to the default condition settings.
Disabling of
YES, NO
Clock Adjustment
This setting is used to prohibit changes to the date and time settings. This item does
not appear when the fax option is installed.
Interface settings
Item
Settings
Description
Hexadecimal
Dump Mode
YES, NO
This program is used to print out the print data from the computer in hexadecimal and
in the corresponding text characters (based on ASCII code). This allows you to check
whether or not print data is being correctly sent from the computer.
I/O Timeout
1- 60 - 999 (sec)
During reception of a print job, if remaining data is not received after the time set here
elapses, the port connection is broken and the next print job is begun.
Emulation
Switching
Auto*, PostScript*,
PCL
Select the printer language. When [Auto] is selected, the language is automatically
selected from the data sent to the printer. Unless errors occur frequently, do not
change the setting from [Auto] to another setting.
*Only when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Port Switching
Method
Switch at End of Job, Select the method for switching network ports.
Switch after I/O Timeout
CONTENTS
I N D E X
37
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
(part 1)
These functions send information on machine use (print count, copy count, etc.) and error conditions (paper misfeed, out of paper,
out of toner, etc.) via e-mail to the administrator of the machine or the dealer.
Information setup
SMTP setup
Machine identification information for the status and alert e-mail
functions is configured in the "Information Setup" screen. The
entered information will be included in status and alert e-mail
messages.
The Status and alert e-mail functions use SMTP (Simple Mail
Transport Protocol) to send e-mail. The following procedure is
used to set up the e-mail environment. This must be done by the
system administrator or other person familiar with the network.
1
Click [Information] in the menu frame.
The "Information Setup" screen
will appear.
2
Click [Services] in the menu frame.
2
Click [SMTP].
3
Enter the information required to set up the
e-mail environment.
The "Services Setup" screen will appear.
Enter the machine information.
For detailed information, click the [Help] button in the
upper right-hand corner of the window.
3
1
For detailed information, click the [Help] button in the
upper right-hand corner of the window.
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
4
CONTENTS
I N D E X
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
38
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
(part 2)
Status message setup
Use the status message function to send the current counter information, including the copy count, print count, and total output
count, basis on the specified schedule. The destinations can be set for administrators and dealers respectively.
To set up the status message, follow these steps.
1
Click [Status Message] in the menu frame.
The "Status Message Setup"
screen will appear.
3
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
When the E-mail Status settings are completed, printer count
information will be sent periodically by e-mail to the specified
e-mail addresses.
Note
2
Enter the required information, including the
destination addresses and time schedule.
If you quit the browser before clicking [Submit], the
settings will be canceled. To send printer information
immediately to the specified e-mail addresses, click
[Send Now].
For detailed information, click the [Help] button in the
upper right-hand corner of the window.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
39
4
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE
E-mail status and e-mail alert settings
(part 3)
Alerts message setup
Use the alert message function to send alert information, such as empty toner and paper and trouble including paper misfeeds, to
specified destinations when such problems occur. The destinations can be set for administrators and dealers respectively.
To set up the alert message, follow the procedure below.
1
Click [Alerts Message] in the menu frame.
The "Alerts Message Setup"
screen will appear.
2
Enter the destination addresses.
For detailed information, click the [Help] button in the
upper right-hand corner of the window.
3
Click [Submit] to store the entered information.
If these parameters are set, event information for the printer will
be transmitted to the specified addresses via E-mail each time
a specified event occurs. The meaning of each event item is
shown below.
(Example)
Paper Jam: A paper misfeed has occurred.
Toner Low: Toner is low.
Toner Empty: Toner must be added.
Paper Empty: Paper must be loaded.
Note
CONTENTS
I N D E X
If you quit the browser before clicking [Submit], the
settings will be canceled.
40
5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve network connection problems. For information on paper, removing misfeeds, and replacing the
toner cartridge, see the operation manual for the machine.
Check the connections
■ Is the LAN cable disconnected?
Make sure that the LAN cable is firmly inserted in the
connectors on the network expansion kit and your computer.
For information on connecting the LAN cable, see software
setup guide for network printer.
■ Is the machine configured for use on the same
network as the computer?
The machine cannot be used if it is not connected to the
same network as the computer, or if it is not configured for
use on the network.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
Points to check in Windows
■ Are you using a port that was created with Standard
TCP/IP Port?
Points to check on the Macintosh
■ Is AppleTalk enabled?
In Mac OS X, click "Network" in "System Preferences" and
select Ethernet in "Show". Click the "AppleTalk" tab and
make sure that "Make AppleTalk Active" is selected.
In Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2, open the "Chooser" from the Apple
menu and make sure that "Active" is selected. Printing is not
possible if "Active" is not selected.
■ Is "Ethernet" selected for the "Connect via" of
AppleTalk? (When using Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.)
Open "AppleTalk" from the "Control Panels" and make sure
that "Ethernet" is selected in the "Connect via" menu.
Printing is not possible if "Ethernet" is not selected.
If you are using a port created using Standard TCP/IP Port in
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, printing may not take
place correctly if "SNMP Status Enabled" is selected in the
port settings of the printer driver. Open the printer driver
properties and click the "Configure Port" button on the
"Ports" tab. In the window that appears, make sure the
"SNMP Status Enabled" checkbox is not selected .
CONTENTS
I N D E X
41
TROUBLESHOOTING
5
Removing the software
In the event that you need to remove the printer driver or utilities, follow these steps:
Windows
1
Macintosh (Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2)
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
On Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start" button, select
"Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
2
3
Click "Add or Remove Programs".
• On Windows Vista, click the "Uninstall a program".
• On Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click the
"Add/Remove Programs" icon.
Select the driver or utility that you wish to
remove from the list, and click the appropriate
button to remove it.
For more information, refer to your operating manual or
to the help files for your operating system.
4
Restart your computer.
Note
1
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" (Disc 2) into your
CD-ROM drive.
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon ( ) on the
desktop and double-click the "Mac OS" folder.
3
Double-click the "Installer" icon (
4
Select "Remove" from the Install menu and then
click the "Remove" button.
Note
).
There is no remove tool for Mac OS X. The PPD file for
Mac OS X has been copied to the following folder in the
startup disk:
[Library] - [Printers] - [PPDs] - [Contents] - [Resources] [En.lproj] folder
When reinstalling the software, install it correctly as explained in software setup guide for the network expansion kit.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
42
SPECIFICATIONS
6
Printer specifications
Printing speed
Max. 20 ppm (when printing on letter size paper)
Resolution
600 dpi / 300 dpi*1
Network expansion kit
memory*2
Standard memory: 64 MB
Additional memory slot: 1 slot (a 128 MB or 256 MB of additional memory module (144-pin SDRAM
SODIMM) can be installed)
Emulation
PCL5e, PCL6, PS3 (PostScript 3)*3
Installed fonts
PCL6/PCL5e compatible: 80 outline fonts and 1 bitmap font
PostScript 3 compatible*3: 136 outline fonts
Interface
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
*1 300 dpi can only be selected when using the PCL6 or PCL5e printer driver.
*2 For information on machine memory, see the manual for the machine.
*3 Available only if the PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK1N) is installed.
Note
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product
improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There
may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
43
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
Function
Frequently used
functions
Paper
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Number of copies
Printing orientation
Two-sided printing
Binding Style
1 to 999
Yes
Yes
Book/Tablet
1 to 999
Yes
Yes
Book/Tablet
1 to 999
Yes
Yes
Book/Tablet
Pamphlet Style
N-up
Number
Order
Border
Paper Size
Custom Paper Size
Source Selection
Cover Settings
Yes
2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Selectable
Yes/No
Yes
1 size
Yes
Yes
Yes
2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Fixed
Yes/No
Yes
1 size
Yes
Yes
Yes
2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Selectable
Yes/No
Yes
1 size
Yes
Yes
(part 1)
Windows
PPD
1 to 999
Yes
Yes
Long Side /
Short Side
No*1
2, 4
Fixed
Yes/No
Yes
3 sizes
Yes
No
Macintosh
PPD
1 to 999
Yes
Yes
Long Side /
Short Side
No
2, 4, 6, 9, 16
Selectable
Selectable
Yes
1 size*2
Yes
Yes
(continued)
*1 Pamphlet style printing is available in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
*2 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
44
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
Function
Graphics
Fonts
Resolution
Halftone
Graphics Mode
Zoom
Mirror Image
Negative Image
Fit to Page
Resident fonts
Selectable download
fonts
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
600/300dpi
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
80 fonts
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
600/300dpi
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
80 fonts
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
600dpi
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
136 fonts
bitmap,
Type 1,
TrueType
(part 2)
Windows
PPD
600dpi
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
136 fonts
bitmap,
Type 1,
TrueType
Macintosh
PPD
600dpi
No
No
Yes
Yes*3
Yes*3
Yes*4
35 fonts
No*5
(continued)
*3 Cannot be used in Mac OS X.
*4 Can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.
*5 Type 1 and TrueType can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
45
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer driver specifications
Function
Other functions
Auto configuration
Settings
ROPM
Overlay
Watermark
Job Compression
Bitmap Compression
(part 3)
Yes
Windows
PPD
No
Macintosh
PPD
Yes*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
PCL6
PCL5e
PS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
*3 Cannot be used in Mac OS X.
CONTENTS
I N D E X
46
7
INDEX
Index
Numerics
F
"2-Up Pamphlet"................................. 11
"Fit to Page" ........................................13
A
H
About the Web pages
For users......................................... 24
For the administrator....................... 32
Accessing Web pages........................ 23
Alerts message setup ........................ 40
"Help" button .........................................9
How to configure the settings .............27
How to use the online manual ..............3
B
Basic printing
Macintosh ....................................... 21
Windows ........................................... 6
"Border".............................................. 12
I
Removing the software....................... 42
"Rotate 180 degrees" ......................... 14
K
S
Key operator programs .......................36
Settings................................................. 9
SMTP setup........................................ 38
SPECIFICATIONS .............................. 43
Status message setup ........................ 39
[Submit Print Job] ............................... 25
N
Cancel a print job
Macintosh ....................................... 22
Windows ........................................... 7
Check the connections....................... 41
Condition settings .............................. 28
Configuring the printer condition settings .... 28
"N-Up Printing"....................................12
Default Settings.................................. 29
Directly printing a file in a computer...... 25
"Document Style" ............................... 10
E
E-mail print function ........................... 34
CONTENTS
R
"Image Orientation".............................14
Information setup ................................38
Introduction ...........................................2
C
D
Printer condition settings .................... 29
Printer driver settings............................ 9
Printer driver specifications ................ 44
Printer specifications .......................... 43
Printer Status Monitor......................... 17
PRINTER UTILITIES .......................... 17
Printing a watermark .......................... 15
PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH ........ 21
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS.............. 6
O
Opening the printer driver .....................8
"Order" ................................................12
P
Pamphlet style ....................................11
Passwords ..........................................33
PCL Settings.......................................30
Points to check on the Macintosh .......41
PostScript Settings .............................31
[Print Port]...........................................34
Printer Administration Utility................17
T
Text To Black....................................... 16
"Tiled Pamphlet" ................................. 11
Troubleshooting .................................. 41
V
Vector To Black ................................... 16
W
"Watermark" ....................................... 15
WEB FUNCTIONS IN THE MACHINE ..... 23
47